Johnson 5300 Series Service Manual

Download

Page 1

DIGITAL/ANALOG MOBILE RADIO

SERVICE

MANUAL

January 2005

Part Number: 001-5300-010CD

Supersedes: 001-5300-009CD; 8/04

5300 SERIES M

OBILE RADIO

■ APCO Project 25 Conventional

■ APCO Project 25 Trunked

■ SMARTNET

/SmartZone

■ Analog FM Conventional

VHF

10-50 or 50-100 Watts

UHF

7-15 or 10-40 Watts

800 MHz

10-35 Watts

13.6 VDC

Part No. 242-53xx-xxx

Page 2

5300 SERIES

MOBILE RADIO

APCO Project 25 Conventional and Trunked

SMARTNET

/SmartZone

Analog (FM) Conventional

13.6 VDC

10-50 Watts or 50-100 Watts (VHF),

15 Watts or 10-40 Watts (UHF), 10-35 Watts (800 MHz)

Part No. 242-53xx-xxx

The E.F. Johnson Company, which was founded in 1923, provides wireless communication systems solutions for public safety, government, and commercial customers. The company designs, manufactures, and markets conventional and trunked radio systems, mobile and portable subscriber radios, repeaters, and Project 25 digital radio products. EFJohnson is a wholly owned subsidiary of EFJ, Inc.

Viking Head/EFJohnson logo, Call Guard the E.F. Johnson Company. SMARTNET™ and SmartZone All other company and/or product names used in this manual are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturer. The IMBE™ voice coding technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

, PCConfigure™, and PCTune™ are trademarks of

are trademarks of Motorola, Inc.

Page 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 SCOPE OF MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2 TRANSCEIVER DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Analog/Digital Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Operating Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Available Mounting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Systems, Channels, and Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.3 PRODUCT WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.4 MODEL NUMBER BREAKDOWN . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.5 SERIAL NUMBER BREAKDOWN . . . . . . . . 1-4

1.6 ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1.7 FACTORY CUSTOMER SERVICE . . . . . . . . 1-5

1.8 RETURNS FOR REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.9 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.10 INTERNET HOME PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.11 SECURE COMMUNICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

FIPS 140-2 Approved Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Over-The-Air-Rekeying (OTAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Key Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.12 RADIO HARDWARE CHANGES . . . . . . . . . 1-8

RF Module Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Logic Board Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

5300 SERIES MOBILE SPECIFICATIONS 1-11

REVISION SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

2INSTALLATION

2.1 IMPORTANT DIGITAL RADIO

INSTALLATION INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 2-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Installation Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.2 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Scope of Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Transceiver Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Power Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.3 TRANSCEIVER INSTALLATION (FRONT

AND REMOTE MOUNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Mounting Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Selecting a Mounting Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Mounting Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Mounting Standard Power Transceiver . . . . . . . . 2-6

Mounting 100W Transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2.4 POWER CABLE INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . 2-6

Standard Models (All Except 100W) . . . . . . . . . 2-6

100W Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.5 ACCESSORY CABLE INSTALLATION. . . . 2-8

General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Ignition Sense Input (Pin 6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Speaker Pins (Pins 1, 2, 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Auxiliary B Out (pin 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

External Public Address (Pin 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Auxiliary B Input (Pin 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

2.6 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Control Unit Board Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Setting Master/Slave Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Configuring Volume Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Mounting Remote Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

2.7 CONNECTING THE SPEAKER . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Using Standard Internal Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Using An Optional External Speaker. . . . . . . . 2-13

2.8 KEY CAP INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

2.9 PIGTAIL CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

2.10 TRANSCEIVER MOUNTING TRAY

INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Locking/Unlocking Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

2.11 HANDHELD CONTROL UNIT

INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Using HHC to Provide Dual Controls or

Dual Remotes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Transceiver Programming With HHC . . . . . . . 2-17

2.12 SIREN OPTION INSTALLATION

INSTRUCTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Transceiver Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

3 OPERATION

3.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

4 TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

4.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Programming Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Computer Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Connecting Computer to Transceiver . . . . . . . . 4-1

Handheld Controller Programming Setup . . . . . 4-2

Siren Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.2 USING THE PCCONFIGURE SOFTWARE .4-2

5 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

5.1 GENERAL TRANSCEIVER DESCRIPTION 5-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

PC Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Page 4

Circuit Protection (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Analog Mode Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Project 25 Digital Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

5.2 UHF RF BOARD (VERSION C) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Synthesizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

5.3 VERSION A/B RF BOARD OVERVIEW . . . 5-5

5.4 VHF/UHF RF BOARD (VERSION A/B) . . . . 5-6

Frequency Generation Unit (FGU) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Antenna Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Receiver Front End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Receiver Back End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

5.5 800 MHz RF BOARD (VERSION A/B) . . . . . 5-9

Frequency Synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Antenna Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Receiver Front End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Receiver Back End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

5.6 VHF 50W PA BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Antenna Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Amplifiers (Q509, Q510). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

5.7 VHF 100W PA BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

5.8 UHF 15W PA BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Antenna Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Amplifiers (Q509, Q508). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

5.9 UHF 40W PA BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Variable Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Driver (Q1), Finals (Q10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Forward Power Detector, Antenna Switch,

Low-Pass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

5.10 800 MHz 35W PA BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Low Power Antenna Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Power Detector and Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Power Amplifier Module (U504), Final (Q509) 5-20

High Power Antenna Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Directional Coupler, Low-Pass Filter,

Temp Sense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

RF Amplifier (Q503) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

5.11 DC POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Power On Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Power Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

5.12 LOGIC BOARD (VERSION C) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Microcontroller (U2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Digital Signal Processing Overview . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Receive Signal Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

6 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

6.1 GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Tune Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

PCTune Version Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.2 MAIN SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2

6.3 MENU BAR DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Radio Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Transfer Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Tools Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

6.4 TUNING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4

Connecting Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Starting and Configuring PCTune . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

6.5 DIGITAL PERFORMANCE TESTS . . . . . . . .6-5

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Receive Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Receive Sensitivity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Transmitter Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

6.6 ANALOG PERFORMANCE TESTS . . . . . . .6-6

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Receiver Performance Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Transmitter Performance Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

7 PARTS LIST

Chassis, Hardware, and Miscellaneous . . . . . . . 7-1

Interface Board (Ver A/B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Interface Board (Ver C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Receiver/Exciter Assembly (Version A/B) . . . . 7-3

UHF Rx/Exciter Assembly (Version C). . . . . . . 7-4

VHF 50W PA Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

VHF 100W PA Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

UHF 15W PA Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

UHF 40W PA Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

800 MHz PA Board Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Logic Board AsSembly (ARM, Ver A) . . . . . . 7-19

Logic Board Assembly (PPC, Ver B). . . . . . . . 7-25

Logic Board Assembly (PPC, Ver C). . . . . . . . 7-31

Front Panel Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Display Controller Board (Revised). . . . . . . . . 7-38

Display Controller Board (Unrev.). . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Remote Control Unit Unique Parts. . . . . . . . . . 7-42

Std. DC Power Cable Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

100W DC Power Cable Assembly . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

Accessory Wire Harness Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

Front Mounting Bracket Assembly . . . . . . . . . 7-43

Amplified Dynamic Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

15 Watt, 4.0-ohm Speaker (Black). . . . . . . . . . 7-44

Page 5

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

15 Watt, 4.0-ohm Motorcyle Speaker . . . . . . . . 7-44

Handheld Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

Siren Controller Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Remote Prog. Interface (RPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Pigtail Cable EMI Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Mechanical Views

Chassis Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

Remote Control Unit/Transceiver Assembly 7-51

Receiver/Exciter Assembly (A300). . . . . . . . 7-52

Display Assembly (A713). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

Front Panel Assembly (A102). . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

100-Watt PA Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54

Handheld Control Unit Junction Box . . . . . . 7-55

Handheld Control Unit (Part 1 of 2) . . . . . . . 7-55

Handheld Control Unit (Part 2 of 2) . . . . . . . 7-56

8 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND

COMPONENT LAYOUTS

Photos

Transceiver Top View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Transceiver Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Receiver/Exciter Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Amplified Dynamic Microphone

Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Interconnect Schematic

Schematic (Ver A/B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Schematic (Ver C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Interface Board

Schematic (Ver A/B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Board Layout (Ver A/B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Interconnect Board (Ver A/B). . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Schematic (Ver C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Board Layout (Ver C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Interconnect Board (Ver C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Accessory Pigtail Cable EMI Board

Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Board Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

VHF RF Board (Ver B)

Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Board Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

VHF 50W PA Board

Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Board Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

VHF 100W PA Board

Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Board Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

UHF RF Board (Ver A/B)

Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Board Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

UHF RF Board (Ver C)

Schematic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Board Top View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28

Board Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

UHF 15W PA Board

Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30

Board Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31

UHF 40W PA Board

Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32

Board Layout Top View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38

Board Layout Bottom View. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39

800 MHz RF Board (Ver A/B)

Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40

Board Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43

800 MHz 35W PA Board

Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44

Board Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45

ARM Logic Board (Ver A)

Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46

Board Top View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49

Board Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50

PPC Logic Board (Ver B)

Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51

Board Top View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54

Board Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55

PPC Logic Board (Ver C)

Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56

Board Top View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70

Board Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71

Display Controller Board

Rev 3 and 5 Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72

Rev 5 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73

Rev 3 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74

Display Board

Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75

Board Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76

Board Top View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76

Remote Transceiver Interconnect Schematic 8-77 Remote Control Unit Audio PA Board

Revised Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78

Revised Board Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78

Unrevised Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79

Unrevised Board Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79

Handheld Control Unit (HHC)

Interconnect Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80

Board Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81

Board Top View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-82

Board Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-82

Junction Box Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83

Junction Box Board Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84

Remote Programming Interface (RPI). . . . . 8-85

Programming Cable Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . 8-85

Page 6

SCHEMATICS AND LAYOUTS FOR EARLY BOARDS -

folder.

See separate file in "EarlyBoards"

LIST OF TABLES

1-1 5300 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1-2 53xx Fi rm ware/Logic Board Versions . . . . . . . . 1-9

2-1 Control Unit DIP Switch S1 Settings . . . . . . . . 2-11

2-2 53xx Mobile Pigtail Cable Guide . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

5-1 LO and First IF Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

LIST OF FIGURES

1-1 Identification Label Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1-2 Hardware Changes Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

2-1 Fron t Moun t Installation Components . . . . . . . . 2-3

2-2 Std Rem ote Mount Installation Components . . . 2-5

2-3 100W Transceiver Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . 2-6

2-4 100W Transceive r Po wer Cable Components . . 2-7

2-5 Accessory Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2-6 Horn Circuit Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

2-7 Revised Display Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2-8 Unrevised Display Controller Bd . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2-9 Locking Tray Installation Diagram . . . . . . . . . 2-14

4-1 Programming Setup (Std Front/Remote Models) 4-1 5-1 UHF RF Board Block Diagram (Version C) . . . 5-3

5-2 RF Board Block Diagram (Version A/B) . . . . . . 5-5

5-3 VHF 50W PA Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . 5-13

5-4 UHF 15W PA Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . 5-15

5-5 UHF 40W PA Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . 5-17

6-1 Alignment Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-2 PCTune Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6-3 RPI Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Page 7

SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 SCOPE OF MANUAL

This service manual contains operation, programming, alignment, and service information for the EFJohnson 5300 series mobile radio. The 53SL and Ascend (Multi-Net) models are similar in appearance and covered by separate manuals. The distinguishing characteristics of the 5300, 53SL, and Ascend models are as follows:

5300 Series Mobile

• Part No. 242-53xx-xxx (see Section 1.4)

• “RS-5300” label on top edge of front panel

• Black front panel bezel

53SL Series Mobile

• Part No. 242-54xx-xxx (see Section 1.4)

• “53SL” label on top edge of front panel

• Grey front panel bezel

Ascend Series Mobile

• Part No. 242-5580-xxx (see Section 1.4)

• “ASCEND” label on top edge of front panel

• Black front panel bezel

1.2 TRANSCEIVER DESCRIPTION

1.2.1 GENERAL

The 5300 series mobile transceivers can operate on various types of channels and with various signaling protocols (see following information). Models are available for operation in the following bands. Repeater talk-around is also available with all bands.

VHF 10-50W standard version,

50-100W high-power version

UHF 7-15W low power version*

10-40W med power version*

800 MHz 10-35W

Version A and B models are available in the 15W configuration only, and Version C models are available in the 40W configuration only (see Section 1.12 for Ve rsion A/B/C information).

1.2.2 ANALOG/DIGITAL OPERATION

The 5300 transceivers use a digital signal processor (DSP) to provide IF and audio filtering and signal modulation functions. This allows operation on the following types of channels, backwards compatibility with existing equipment, and also the ability to operate on various types of radio systems.

Narrow Band Analog maximum deviation of 2.5 kHz. This mode is usually used in systems with a channel spacing of 12.5 or 15 kHz.

Wideband Analog maximum deviation of 5 kHz. This mode is usually used in systems where the channel spacing is 25 kHz or 30 kHz.

Project 25 Digital systems. The voice is digitized, error corrected, optionally encrypted, and then transmitted using C4FM modulation according to the Project 25 standard. This mode uses a channel spacing of 12.5 kHz.

- FM modulation is used with a

- Operates on Project 25 compatible

VHF 136-174 MHz (35-watt models)

146-174 MHz (100-watt models)

UHF 380-470 MHz (Federal users only)

403-470 MHz

800 MHz 806-870 MHz (see following)

Power Output

Power output is user switchable for low and high

levels in the following ranges:

1.2.3 OPERATING PROTOCOLS

The 5300 transceivers can be programmed for all the following operating protocols. The conventional analog protocol is standard and the others are optional (available only if enabled by factory programming). Refer to Section 3 for more operation information.

• APCO Project 25 (digital) conventional

• APCO Project 25 (digital) trunked

1-1

Page 8

GENERAL INFORMATION

• SMARTNET

/SmartZone® trunked analog or

digital

• Analog conventional

NOTE: Multi-Net operation can be programmed with Ascend models only.

1.2.4 AVAILABLE MOUNTING OPTIONS

Front Mount - The operating controls are on the front on the radio, so the radio must be mounted within reach of the user.

Remote Mount, Single Control Unit - The operating controls are located on a remote mounted control unit. The radio does not have operating controls.

Remote Mount, Dual Controls - A remote control unit is connected to the front mount radio. This allows control from the front panel and the remote control unit.

Remote Mount, Dual Remote Control Units - Two remote control units are connected to the remote mount radio. This allows control from both remote control units.

1.2.5 SYSTEMS, CHANNELS, AND ZONES

squelch coding, and other parameters unique to that channel.

Conventional Project 25 Mode - A channel selects a specific radio channel, NAC squelch coding, talk group ID, and other parameters unique to that channel.

Trunked Project 25 Mode - A channel selects a specific talk group ID and other parameters unique to that talk group.

SmartNet/SmartZone and Project 25 Trunked Operation - A channel selects a specific talk group,

announcement group, emergency group, and other parameters unique to that talk group.

As previously described, a maximum of up to 256 channels can be programmed. Although it is theoretically possible to program any combination of systems that produces up to 256 total channels, the maximum number may be limited by the available memory. For example, since more memory is required to program a SMARTNET system than a conventional system, the total number of channels decreases as the number of SMARTNET systems increases. The programming software displays a bar graph which shows the amount of available memory space that is used by the current data. Refer to Section 4 for more information.

A zone and channel are selected to place and receive calls. The following describes the relationship between systems, channels, and zones.

Systems

A system is a collection of channels or talk groups belonging to the same repeater site. It defines all the parameters and protocol information required to access a site. Up to 16 systems of any type can be programmed. The maximum number of channels assignable to a system is limited to approximately 256 (or the available memory space as described in the following information).

Channels

A channel selects a radio channel or talk group in a system as follows:

Conventional Analog Mode - A channel selects a specific radio channel, Call Guard (CTCSS/DCS)

Zone

A zone is a collection of up to 16 channels of any type. For example, a zone could include 12 conventional channels and 4 SMARTNET channels. One use of zones may be to program the channels used for operation in a specific geographical area. Up to 16 zones can be programmed.

1.2.6 PROGRAMMING

Transceiver programming is performed using a PC-compatible computer and an EFJohnson RPI (Remote Programming Interface) and PCConfigure programming software (see Table 1-1). Programming is described in a separate included manual. Refer to Section 4 for more information.

1.2.7 ALIGNMENT

Transceiver alignment is performed using the same computer and RPI used for programming (see

1-2

Page 9

GENERAL INFORMATION

preceding section) and special PCTune™ software. All adjustments are made electronically using the software (no manual adjustments are required). Alignment is described in Section 6.

Model Number

Serial Number

Figure 1-1 Identification Label Example

1.3 PRODUCT WARRANTY

The warranty statement for this transceiver is available from your product supplier or from the Warranty Department, E.F. Johnson Company, 1440 Corporate Drive, Irving, TX 75038-2401. This information may also be requested from the Warranty Department by phone as described in Section 1.7. The Warranty Department may also be contacted for Warranty Service Reports, claim forms, or any other questions concerning warranties or warranty service.

1.4 MODEL NUMBER BREAKDOWN

The radio model number is located on the radio identification label attached to the bottom cover (see Figure 1-1). The following is a breakdown of this number:

242-5MFT-SEC-OADE

M (Model)

3 - 5300 Series 4 - 53SL Series 5 - Ascend Series

F (Frequency Band)

1 - VHF (136-174 MHz) 2 - VHF HB (146-174 MHz) 3 - UHF (403-470 MHz)

4 - UHF (450-512 MHz) Not available 6 - UHF (380-470 MHz) 7 - 762-806 and 806-870 MHz 8 - 800-870 MHz

T (Type)

0 - Motorcycle 3 - Medium Power (40W UHF), Dash Mount 4 - Medium Power (40W UHF,) Remote Mount 5 - High Power (100W VHF), Dash Mount 6 - High Power (100W VHF), Remote Mount 7 - Standard Power, Dash Mount 8 - Standard Power, Remote Mount 9 - Standard Power, Dash Mount Public Works

S (Signaling, Primary)

2 - P25 Conv. Analog/Digital 4 - Special 8 - Analog Mode Only

E (Encryption Type)

0 - No encryption 5 - DES/DES-OFB (SEM*) 6 - DES/DES-XL/DES-OFB (UCM only*) 7 - DES/DES-OFB/AES (SEM*) 8 - DES/DES-XL/DES-OFB/AES (UCM only*)

(* See Sections 1.11 and 1.12.2 for more information.)

C (Configuration)

1 - Six button standard control unit 4 - Dual Controls (Front + Remote) 5 - Handheld Control Unit (HHC) 6 - Dual Remote (Two Rem Ctrl Units) 7 - Transit Bus System 8 - Motorcycle (rotary on-off) 9 - Modified logic, B+ on J5, -280 cable

O (Options

A - Std cable, no installed options (-230) D - + Data/Accessory cable (-282) S - + Siren cable (-231) U - + UI cable (-245) R - + Remote/Accessory cable (-249) T - + Dual remote cable (-283) C - + 2nd control hd cable (-251)

A (Analog or Additional Signaling)

A - No additional signaling B - P25 and SN/SZ trunking analog/digital C - SMARTNET trunking E - SMARTNET/SmartZone trunking

1-3

Page 10

GENERAL INFORMATION

NOTE: With 5300 models, analog voice is standard with digital SMARTNET or SmartZone signaling.

D (Data Options)

A - No data B - P25 Conventional Mobile Data C - P25 Trunked/Conv Mobile Data* D - Zone Fail, No Data F - Zone Fail, Conventional Data G - Zone Fail, Trunking Data

E (Encryption and Security Software)

B - Default (non-OTAR) C - OTAR P25 conventional and trunked D - Same as “C” above

1.5 SERIAL NUMBER BREAKDOWN

The radio serial number is located on the radio identification label attached to the bottom cover (see Figure 1-1). The following is a breakdown of this number:

The accessory cable plugs into the accessory pigtail of the transceiver, and is used to connect such things as an external speaker, ignition sense input, and a horn alert. It includes two 22-foot and three 2-foot wires that are connected as required to external points. The adapter cable is used to connect a 86xx-series power cable to these transceivers.

Lockable Mounting Tray - This bracket allows the transceiver to be locked in place to guard against theft. In addition, it allows it to be easily unlocked and removed from the vehicle. This bracket is intended for use with standard models only (not 100W). Refer to Section 2.10 for installation information.

Microphones and Speaker - The microphones in Table 1-1 have an impedance of 620 ohms. All DTMF microphones are backlighted. The environmentally sealed microphone is sealed against such things as rain, sand, and dust. The desk microphone can be used for control station applications.

PlantFrom P.N.

Warranty

Number

Model Revision

Letter

Manufacture

Date

53xx 0 G 43 4 X 12345

A = Wa seca

Week No.

of Year

T = Texas

Last Digit of Year

1.6 ACCESSORIES

The accessories available for this transceiver are listed in Table 1-1. A brief description of some of these accessories follows:

Key Cap Kit - The key cap kit includes key caps labeled for various functions and five plugs that can be inserted in the front panel if a key is not used. Refer to Section 2.8 for more information.

Mounting Hardware - The mounting hardware and DC power cable for standard models are shown in Figures 2-1 and 2-3 in Section 2. The mounting hardware and DC power cable for 100-watt models are shown in Figure 2-4. A 22-foot DC power cable is used for both front and remote mount applications. The cable is cut to the required length at installation and any excess discarded.

The external 15-watt speaker can be used in place of the internal 5-watt speaker. It is non-amplified and weatherproof. This speaker is connected to pins 1 and 2 of the accessory connector pigtail on the back of the transceiver. Audio power output is 12 watts with this external speaker or 5 watts with the internal speaker.

Control Station Power Supply - With the -4001medium-duty power supplies, the transceiver slides into the power supply housing and receives power from banana jacks on the back of the power supply. The standard power cable is used for connecting power, and the internal transceiver speaker provides speaker audio. The -004 adapter cable is used to connect the transceiver DC and accessory pigtail cables to the power supply power cable and speaker. The transceiver internal speaker can also be used if desired.

Programming Hardware and Software - The RPI provides the interface between the programming computer and transceiver. The cables from the RPI to computer and transceiver are not included with the RPI and must be ordered separately. The transceiver programming software is available only for computers

running Windows

95/98/NT/2000/XP.

1-4

Page 11

GENERAL INFORMATION

Table 1-1 5300 Accessories

Accessory Part No.

Key Cap Kit (see Section 2.8) 587-5300-001

Mounting Accessories

Mounting bracket & hardware kit (std) 023-9750-012 Mounting bracket (100W/bot radio only) 017-9700-009

Mounting bracket (100W/bot-top radio) 017-9700-008 DC power cable & hardware, 22 ft. (std) 023-9750-010 DC pwr cable & hardware, 22 ft. (100W) 023-5315-100 Accessory wire kit 023-9750-011 Lockable Mounting Tray (std models only) 585-7000-185

Microphones

Standard amplified dynamic 250-0740-310 DTMF w/o mem, commercial 589-0016-028 DTMF w/o mem, env seal WR805 587-9650-015 Noise canceling, weather resistant 589-0016-592 Desk microphone 589-0012-021

Speakers

External, 5" 15W 3.2 ohm environmental

sealed w/plug for HHC

External, 5" 15W 3.2 ohm environmental

sealed w/terminals for acc cable

External, 5”, 15W 3.2 ohm motorcycle w/ mute sw

Handheld Control Unit and Siren Controller

Handheld control unit w/junction box and

17 ft control cable Handheld control unit junction box only 250-5300-102 Siren controller kit (w/o loudspeaker) 250-5300-100 Siren loudspeaker, model TS100 for

light bar installation Siren loudspeaker, model MS100 com-

pact for behind grill installation

Remote Control Conversion Kit

Dual control kit (convert frt mt to remote or dual controls)

Control station power supplies

15 amp, 117 VAC, 60 Hz (medium duty) 585-4001-202 15 amp, 230 VAC, 50 Hz (medium duty) 585-4001-204 30 amp, heavy duty for 100W models 250-5300-212 DC and speaker cable adapter for

-0226- supply

Programming Accessories

Remote prog interface (RPI) 023-5300-000 Cable, RPI to transceiver 023-5300-005 Cable, RPI to computer DB9M-DB9F 6 ft 597-5900-002

250-0151-005

250-0151-006

250-0151-015

250-5300-101

585-5300-007

585-5300-009

250-5300-001

023-9650-004

Table 1-1 5300 Accessories (Continued)

Accessory Part No.

PCConfigure prog software, CD 023-9998-488 PCTune software, CD (current logic bds) 023-9998-499 PCTune software, CD (Rev 3 and earlier

bds; radio PN 242-531x-1xx) Programming Kit, includes -488 software,

-005 cable, RPI, CD prog manual

Handheld control unit prog cable adapter 023-5300-140

Encryption Keyloader and Accessories

SMA (PDA) keyloader SMA keyloader to 5100 radio cable SMA keyloader to 5300 radio cable

Accessory Pigtail Cables See Section 2.9

023-5000-093

250-5000-004

250-5000-945 023-5000-940 023-5000-950

Encryption Options - In radios using the new revised PPC logic board that require encryption, the radio is ordered with either the EFJohnson SEM module or the Motorola UCM module (see Section 1.12.2). With radios using the ARM board, encrypted radios are equipped with a different version of the UCM module. Modules are available for only Revision 6 or later versions of this board. Contact Customer Service for more information on the availability of encryption modules.

A key loader and an adapter cable are required to load encryption keys. The EFJohnson SMA (Subscriber Management Assistant) key loader part number is listed in Table 1-1. With OTAR, the key loader is required to perform the initial load of keys and after that the keys are loaded over the air. The adapter cable connects the key loader to the transceiver microphone jack. Special programming using PCConfigure is also required as described in Section 4.

1.7 FACTORY CUSTOMER SERVICE

The Customer Service Department of the E.F. Johnson Company provides customer assistance on technical problems and the availability of local and factory repair facilities. Regular Customer Service hours are 8:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. Central T ime, MondayFriday. A technical support subscription service is available or support can be purchased on an as-needed

1-5

Page 12

GENERAL INFORMATION

basis. The Customer Service Department can be reached using the following telephone numbers:

Toll-Free: (800) 328-3911 (all except Multi-Net)

(800) 295-1773 (Multi-Net only) FAX: (972) 818-0639 E-Mail: customerservice@efjohnson.com

You can also e-mail a person directly if you know their first initial/last name (example: jsmith@efjohnson.com).

NOTE: Emergency 24-hour technical support is also available at the 800 and pr eceding numbers during off hours, holidays, and weekends.

When your call is answered at the E.F. Johns on Company, you will hear a brief message informing you of numbers that can be entered to reach various departments. This number may be entered during or after the message using a tone-type telephone. If you wait until the message is finished and an operator will come on the line to assist you. When you enter some numbers, another number is requested to further categorize the type of information you need.

You may also contact the Customer Service Department by mail. Please include all information that may be helpful in solving your problem. The mailing address is as follows:

charge by calling Customer Service (see Section 1.7) or by requesting them when you send a unit in for repair. Clearly describe the difficulty experienced in the space provided and also note any prior physical damage to the equipment. Include this form in the shipping container with each unit. Your telephone number and contact name are important as there are times when the technicians may have specific questions that need to be answered in order to completely identify and repair a problem.

When returning equipment for repair, it is also recommended that you use a PO number or some other reference number on your paperwork in case you need to call the repair lab about your unit. These numbers are referenced on the repair order and make it easier and faster to locate your unit in the lab.

Return Authorization (RA) numbers are not necessary unless you have been given one by the Field Service Department. RA numbers are required for exchange units or if the Field Service Department wants to be aware of a specific problem. If you have been given an RA number, reference this number on the Factory Repair Request Form sent with the unit. The repair lab will then contact the Field Service Department when the unit arrives. For additional information on factory service, the Depot Service Department can be contacted at the following E-mail address:

E.F. Johnson Company Customer Service Department 1440 Corporate Drive Irving, TX 75038-2401

1.8 RETURNS FOR REPAIRS

Repair service is normally available through local authorized EFJohnson Land Mobile Radio Service Centers. However, before returning equipment, contact the Customer Service Repair Depot for the correct “Ship To” address. It is suggested that you call Tech Support as they may be able to suggest a solution to the problem that would make return of the equipment unnecessary.

Be sure to fill out a Factory Repair Request Form #271 for each unit to be repaired, whether it is in or out of warranty. These forms are available free of

depotrepair@efjohnson.com

1.9 REPLACEMENT PARTS

Replacement parts can be ordered directly from the Service Parts Department. T o order parts by phone, dial the toll-free number as described in Section 1.7. When ordering, please supply the part number and quantity of each part ordered. EFJohnson dealers also need to give their account number. If there is uncertainty about the part number, include the designator (C512, for example) and the model number of the equipment the part is from.

You may also send your order by mail or FAX. The mailing address is as follows and the FAX number is shown in Section 1.7.

1-6

Page 13

GENERAL INFORMATION

E.F. Johnson Company Service Parts Department 1440 Corporate Drive Irving, TX 75038-2401

1.10 INTERNET HOME PAGE

The E.F. Johnson Company has a site on the World Wide Web that can be accessed for information on the company about such things as products, systems, and regulations. The address is http://www.efjohnson.com.

1.11 SECURE COMMUNICATION

NOTE: Refer to Section 11 of the 5300 Operating Manual for more information on secure communication. A link to the operating manual is located in Section 3 of this manual.

1.11.1 GENERAL

SecureNet™ and AES voice encryption are used to provide secure communication with this transceiver . These protocols digitize the voice and then encrypt it using a DES or AES algorithm. The following types of encryption are available on analog and digital channels:

tion on analog channels is not FIPS certified. FIPS 140-02 is a Federal Information Processing Standard recently approved by the United States Secretary of Commerce. This standard specifies Federal security requirements for cryptographic modules for a wide range of applications and environments.

1.11.3 OVER-THE-AIR-REKEYING (OTAR)

Encryption keys are loaded into the radio by OTAR (Over-The-Air-Rekeying) using a KMF (Key Management Facility) and/or a handheld keyloader such as the EFJohnson SMA (Subscriber Management Assistant) or Motorola KVL 3000 Plus with the AES option.

The keyloader is connected directly to the radio using an interconnect cable, and it loads DES, DESOFB, and AES keys. Currently, OTAR can be used to load DES-OFB keys on Project 25 conventional channels. Future OTAR of AES keys and on Project 25 trunked channels is planned. Refer to Section 11 of the 5300 Operating Manual for more OTAR information. A link to this manual is located in Section 3 of this manual.

Analog Conventional and SMARTNET/SmartZone Analog Channels

• DES

• DES-XL (5300 versions with UCM module

only; see Section 1.12.2)

Digital Project 25 and SMARTNET/SmartZone Channels

• DES-OFB (Output Feedback)

• AES (Advanced Encryption Standard). Later

5300 models only. Refer to Section 11 of the 5300 Operating Manual for more information (a link is located in Section 3).

1.11.2 FIPS 140-2 APPROVED ENCRYPTION

All encrypted 5300 models are FIPS certified for

the DES-OFB and AES encryption modes. Encryp-

1.11.4 KEY RETENTION

NOTE: The 5300 radio has a security feature (pushbutton switch S1 on the logic board) that automatically erases the encryption keys when the bottom cover is removed (except when Infinite Key Retention is programmed as follows).

If Infinite Key Retention Infinite Key Retention is programmed, the keys are maintained in memory indefinitely, even without power applied. If it is not programmed, the transceiver must be connected to an unswitched power source to preserve the encryption keys in memory. However, a storage capacitor (C173,

0.22 F) maintains the 5-volt supply (and the encryption keys) for approximately 8 hours if power is temporarily lost.

1-7

Page 14

GENERAL INFORMATION

HC ELUDOM FR

A noisreV

-0115-32

enut

100

zHM

083 F

100

5-320

-021

zHM

304 FH

100

5-320

-031

008

zHM

100-0815-32

.seludom eseht

zHM 471-631

zHM 074-083

zHM 074-304

078-608

zHM

t desu eb nac 9.8.0.1 enuTCP

yB decalpeR

decalpeR

yB decalpe

B decalpeR

A noisreV

)rossecorP MRA(

draoB

cigoL

xx4-0035-3

U U

M encryption moduleC

eht fo noisrev reilrae na ses

MRA dna PSD htob seriuq

x.1 noisreV ,erawmri

elbaliava noitpyrcne LX-S

B noisreV

raoB

cigoL MES

116-0035-32

goL MCU

draoB ci

126-

0035-32

B noisreV

100

-0115-320

083 FHU

zHM

00-0215-320

304 FHU

zHM

00-0315-320

zHM 008

100-0815-320

xr ronim evah seludom esehT

)rossecorP CPP(

esU

SED

noisreV

SEGNA

C noisreV

zHM 471-631

4-08

zHM 0

zHM 074-304

zHM 078-608

hc rehto dna dne tnorf

9.8.0.1 noisreV ,srehto eht htiW .desu eb tsum retal

b nac

yB decalpeR

yB decalpe

eht htiW .se

ro 01.1.1 noisreV enuTCP ,)retal ro "H" retteL veR( ylno eludom FHV

.desu e

FHV

055-5

001-0

zHM 083

FHU

5-585

003-005

M 304 FHU

elbitapmo

003-0055-58

zHM 00

8-007

-005

007

5-585

m d

eder yletelpmoC

engis

ois

reV htiw

C n

zHM 471-

631

zHM 074-0

074-

zHM

304

zHM

8-267

udo oL

era taht sel

.ylno cig

.des

u eb tsum retal ro 0.2 noisreV enuTCP

SEGNAHC CIGOL

deunitnocsiD

C noisreV

ludom MES JFE s

elbaliava ton LX-

devorppa SP

erawmri

F x.x.2

noisreV htiw elbitapmoC

lnO seludoM FR B dna A

eludom MCU toM sesU

elbaliava LX-SED

devorppa SPIF

erawmriF x.x.3 noisreV

nois

reV htiw elbitapmoC

ylnO seludoM FR B dna

400

yB decalpeR

)rossecorP CPP(

draoB cigoL MES

06-0055-320

deunitnocsiD

5002

eludom MES JFE sesU

elbaliava ton LX-SED

devorppa SPIF

erawmriF x.x.4 noisreV

noisreV htiw elbitapmoC

lnO seludoM FR C

Figure 1-2 Hardware Changes Flowchart

1.12 RADIO HARDWARE CHANGES

NOTE: Version A/B/C references in the following information are for descriptive purposes in this manual only and do not correspond to any radio revision letters or letters on the boards.

1.12.1 RF MODULE CHANGES

As shown in Figure 1-1, there have been three significant changes to the 5300 RF module. More information on each of these versions follows.

Version A - This is the original version that was used until approximately late 2003. All versions of PCTune can be used to tune radios with these modules. The schematic diagrams and board layout for this version of the VHF board are located in the Early_Bds folder and the other boards are located in Section 8.

Version B - The changeover to this version occurred starting in late 2003. This change was made because of

parts obsolescence. Significant changes occurred to only the VHF board, so this is the only board with revised schematics and layouts in this manual. With the UHF and 800 MHz boards, only minor layout and value changes occurred. The Version B boards are being replaced by the following Version C boards as they become available.

NOTE: PCTune, Version 1.10.0 or later must be used to tune VHF

radios with this board (see following).

PCTune Version 1.10.0 or later must be used to adjust radios with this version VHF board because of changes made in the front end. The earlier PCTune version (1.0.8.9) can still be used to tune all other Version B and all Version A boards.

The Revision Letter in the radio identification number (see Section 1.5) can be used to determine if a VHF radio has this new Version B board. Radios with a revision letter of “H” or later have the new board and PCTune 1.10.0 or later must be used.

1-8

Page 15

Table 1-2 53xx Firmware/Logic Board Versions

GENERAL INFORMATION

Firmware Version

Version 1 (Uses early Motorola UCM module)

This is the ARM logic version which uses a different UCM module than is used in Version 3 which follows. This version is no longer available and uses the 035-1800-4xx Version C logic board.

Version 2 (uses EFJ SEM module)

Current version which has the EFJohnson SEM (Subscriber Encryption Module) on the logic board. This version uses the 035-5300-600 V ersion B logic board. All radios include the SEM, and the desired encryption options (if any) are enabled by factory programming. FIPS approved.

Version 3 (uses Motorola UCM module)

Current version (B) which has the Motorola UCM (Universal Crypto Module) on the logic board. This version also uses the uses the 035-5300-600 V ersion B logic board with the addition of a few parts. This version is ordered when DES-XL encryption is required. FIPS approved.

Version 4 (uses EFJ SEM module)

New version (C) designed for use with new RF modules. It uses the same EFJohnson SEM (Subscriber Encryption Module) as Version 2 boards above. This version uses the 035-5500-600 Version C logic board. All radios include the SEM, and the desired encryption options (if any) are enabled by factory programming. FIPS approved.

Application (Firmware)

Code Base

1.xx (both DSP and ARM code required)

2.xx Yes No Yes Yes

3.xx Yes Yes Yes Yes

4.xx Yes No Yes Yes

Analog Channel

Encryption

DES DES-XL DES-OFB AES

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Digital Channel

Encryption

Version C - These boards are a completely new

design. Highlights of this board version are as follows:

• Because of different interface requirements, the new

Version C logic board described in the next section must be used with these RF boards.

• A new version of the PCTune software (2.0 or later)

is required to tune radios with these boards.

• The new 800 MHz version of this board (not

currently available with 53xx) operates on both 700 and 800 MHz channels instead of only 800 MHz channels like the A and B versions. Therefore, radios with the Version C board can operate on channels from 762-870 MHz, while radios with the earlier Version A and B boards can operate only on channels from 806-870 MHz.

Radios with this new 700/800 MHz RF board have a “7” as the “F” character of the radio part number (see Section 1.4), while radios with the older A and B versions have an “8” for this character.

1.12.2 LOGIC BOARD CHANGES

As shown in Figure 1-1 and Table 1-2, there have been three significant changes to the control logic used in 53xx series radios. More information on these changes follows.

NOTE: The firmware version number (1.x/2.x/3.x) is the second number briefly displayed when radio power is turned on (the first number is for the control unit).

Version A - This version uses ARM processor-based control logic, and the PC board is Part No.

1-9

Page 16

GENERAL INFORMATION

035-1800-42x. This board has a jack for plugging in various Motorola encryption modules that provide DES/DES-XL/DES-OFB and AES encryption. It does not use the SEM module. This service manual includes schematic, board layout, and parts information for this and an even earlier -40x version of this board. This board is no longer shipping in new radios and has been replaced by the following PPC versions.

Radios with this logic board have Version 1.x firmware (see Table 1-2). Both DSP and ARM code files may be required to update the firmware.

Version B

Beginning in November 2003, a revised logic board began shipping in 53xx models. This board utilizes a Power PC (PPC) control logic design similar to that used in the 51xx portable. This board is available in the following configurations:

SEM Version

- This version has the EFJohnson

SEM (Security Encryption Module) soldered to the board. It is used whenever DES, DES-OFB, or AES encryption is required. DES-XL encryption is not available with this version. Radios with this logic board have Version 2.x firmware (see Table 1-2).

UCM Version

- This version includes a plug-in

Motorola UCM encryption module instead of the

SEM. It is used whenever DES-XL Motorola proprietary encryption is required. It also provides DES, DES-OFB, or AES encryption. Other differences between this board and the SEM version are that it has a jack for plugging in the module (J2) and an additional PLC IC (U82). Radios with this logic board have Version 3.x firmware (see Table 1-2).

The part number of the Version B logic board is 035-5300-600. The same PC board is used for both of the preceding configurations (each version is populated differently). This service manual includes schematic, board layout, and parts list information for this new logic board.

Radios with the new PPC revised logic board have a Revision Letter

of “G” or higher in the serial number. Radios with the early -400/-410 ARM logic board have a A-F Revision letter. Refer to the radio Serial Number on the label on the bottom cover to determine the Revision Letter (see Section 1.5).

Version C - This version of the logic and UI boards is a new design that is required to interface with the new Version C RF module. Only a SEM version is being offered (similar to Version 2 in Table 1-2). This version of board has more Flash and RAM memory to allow additional features to be added if necessary. Radios with this logic board have Version 4.x.x firmware (see Table 1-2).

1-10

Page 17

GENERAL INFORMATION

5300 SERIES MOBILE SPECIFICATIONS

The following are general specifications intended for use in testing and servicing this transceiver. For current advertised specifications, refer to the specification sheet available from your sales representative. Values are typical and are subject to change without notice.

GENERAL

Frequency Range VHF: 136-174 MHz standard models; 146-174 MHz high power models

UHF: 403-470 MHz; 380-470 MHz

800 MHz: 806-824 MHz Tx std, 851-869 MHz Tx Tlk-Ard, 851-869 MHz Rx Operating Modes Conv, Project 25 Conv, Project 25 Trunked, SMARTNET, SmartZone Mounting Location Dash Mount (Remote mount optional) Zones/Channels Up to 16 zones with 16 channels per zone Transmit/Receive Separation Any frequency within the range Channel Spacing VHF: 12.5, 15, 25, and 30 kHz

UHF: 12.5 and 25 kHz

800 MHz: 12.5 and 25 kHz Maximum Deviation 25 kHz analog - 5 kHz

12.5 kHz analog - 2.5 kHz

12.5 kHz analog NPSPAC - 4.0 kHz Frequency Stability Rx and Tx 2.5 PPM VHF, 2.0 PPM UHF, 2.5 PPM 800 MHz (–30° to +60° C) Dimensions (w/o antenna) Std - 2.1” H x 7.2” W x 8.3” D (5.3 cm x 18.2 cm x 21.1 cm)

100W - 2.1” H x 7.2” W x 13.75” D (5.3 cm x 18.2 cm x 34.9 cm)

Weight (w/std battery) 5 lbs. 4 oz. (2.38 kg) Supply Voltage 13.6 volts DC nominal, negative ground Current Drain (maximum) Standby - 600 mA

Receive (rated audio out) - 2.7 A Rated Tx Power - 13.2 A (std), 27.5A (100W)

RECEIVER

Sensitivity 0.35 µV (analog mode 12 dB SINAD), 0.35 µV (digital mode 5% BER) Selectivity –75 dB Spurious and Image Rejection –75 dB Intermodulation –75 dB VHF, –77 dB UHF, –73 dB 800 MHz Hum and Noise 40 dB at 25 kHz, 34 dB at 12.5 kHz Maximum Frequency Spread Any spread within the range Audio Power Output 5 W with internal speaker (12 W w/external 4-ohm speaker) Audio Distortion Less than 3% at 1 kHz

TRANSMITTER

RF Power Output VHF medium power: 10-50 W, VHF high power: 50-100 W

UHF low power: 7-15W, UHF medium power: 10-40 W

800 MHz medium power: 10-35 W Spurious and Harmonic Emissions –70 dB (VHF), –60 dB (800 MHz) FM Hum and Noise –45 dB at 25 kHz bandwidth Audio Modulation 8K10F1E, 11K0F3E (VHF/UHF), 14K0F3E (800 MHz), 16K0F3E, 20K0F1E Audio Distortion Less than 3% at 1 kHz Maximum Frequency Spread Any spread within the band

1-11

Page 18

REVISION SUMMARY

GENERAL INFORMATION

REVISIONS INCLUDED IN THIS MANUAL

This manual includes the revisions included in

previous versions plus the following:

• Included information on the Version C UHF RF

module.

• Included information on the Version C logic board

used with the Version C RF module. Also included information on the new Interface and Interconnect boards used with these Version C boards.

• Included information on the new 40W UHF PA

board.

• Included the latest operating and programming

manuals.

• Miscellaneous hardware and other updates

• Recent accessory pigtail cables include an EMI

board which provides electromagnetic interference protection in series with each wire. Currently, only the Accessory cable, Part No. 023-5300-630, is available (see Section 2.9 for more information).

REVISIONS INCLUDED IN PREVIOUS -009 MANUAL

The following information summarizes the main changes that were included in the -009 5300 Service Manual with a release date of August 2004.

• Included information on V ersion B RF modules (see

Section 1.12.1). Also miscellaneous updates to Section 1.

• Included information on a Version B PPC logic

board (see Section 1.12.2). Also miscellaneous updates to Section 1.

• Updated Installation information (Section 2) with

additional photos, changes for remote control unit programming, and other information.

• New remote control unit audio P A board and display

controller board layout (same controller schematic) to add 5-pin connector to boards.

REVISIONS INCLUDED IN PREVIOUS -007 MANUAL

The following information summarizes the main changes that were included in the -007 5300 Service Manual with a release date of August 2003.

• Miscellaneous updates to Section 1.

• The latest operating information (Section 3) and

programming information (Section 4).

• Updated Installation information (Section 2) with

added important installation guidelines, dual remote, and other changes.

• Updated Alignment (Section 6) with information on

how to check performance in digital mode.

• Updated logic board that includes changes for

proper horn alert operation. The horn alert is now controlled by the H3 pin of U6. Several parts were changed, deleted, and added.

• The latest operating and programming manuals are

included.

• Miscellaneous hardware updates

REVISIONS INCLUDED IN PREVIOUS -008 MANUAL

The following information summarizes the main changes that were included in the -008 5300 Service Manual with a release date of November 2003.

REVISIONS INCLUDED IN PREVIOUS -006 MANUAL

The following information summarizes the main changes that were included in the -006 5300 Service Manual with a printing date of November 2002.

• Miscellaneous changes to VHF and UHF P A boards.

• Other miscellaneous updates.

1-12

Page 19

GENERAL INFORMATION

REVISIONS INCLUDED IN PREVIOUS -005 MANUAL

The following information summarizes the main changes that were included in the -005 5300 Service Manual with a printing date of July 2002.

Operation Changes (see Section 3)

• The Hardware Key select option switch is available

on conventional channels only.

• The Normal/Selective option switch now disables

P25 group ID detect instead of NAC. In addition, cycling power no longer reselects the default mode.

• With both conventional and SMARTNET/Smart-

Zone operation, up to 256 scan lists and 256 channels/groups per list can be programmed.

• SMARTNET/SmartZone scan lists can now be

temporarily selected by a new Scan (List) Select option switch).

Hardware Changes

• Added information for the new UHF models

• Logic board clock circuit change. Also, R240 on

input of U19A changed and buffers on J4, pins 8 and 9 deleted.

• New display controller board layout. The only elec-

trical changes were R2, R104, and R105.

• Other miscellaneous minor updates

REVISIONS INCLUDED IN PREVIOUS -004 MANUAL

The following information summarizes the main changes that were included in the -004 5300 Service Manual with a printing date of March 2002. That manual replaced the -003 manual which had a printing date of March 2000.

PCConfigure Programming Software

The PCTrunk programming software has been replaced with PCConfigure. This software has an entirely new user interface (programming screens) although the information programmed is basically the same. PCConfigure is required to program many of the features in current models, so it is recommended that you upgrade to PCConfigure. Refer to Section 4 for more information on the PCConfigure software.

New Logic Board

The logic board is a new design with different parts and layout. The schematic and board layout in this manual have been updated with this new board. Information for the earlier boards is included in the Early_Bds folder on the CD-ROM.

This new logic board is Revision 5 or later, and it provides a new optional enhanced “Over The Air ReKeying” (OTAR) feature for use with SecureNet encryption. The Revision 6 or later board is required to use the currently available UCM encryption module (see Section 1.6).

Models with the Revision 6 or later logic board have a revision later of “G” or higher (standard power models) or “B” or higher (100W VHF models). Refer to Section 1.5 for more revision letter information.

New RF Boards

A new VHF RF board is being used and a new 800 MHz RF board is being phased in. These boards have a new pin out arrangement that requires a short ribbon cable and new interconnect board design. Section 8 includes the schematics and layouts for the revised boards, and Early_Bds folder on the CD-ROM includes this information for the unrevised boards.

Models with the new RF board have a revision later of “H” or higher (standard power models) or “C” or higher (100W VHF models). Refer to Section 1.5 for more revision letter information.

New VHF (50W) PA Board

A newly designed PA board is now being used. The main change to this board was converting several mini mica capacitors to ceramic type. Tap points were also added for the cables to the 100W PA board when it is used. The schematic and layout for this new board is included in this manual, and the earlier board is included in the Early_Bds folder on the CD-ROM.

New VHF 100W Models

This manual includes installation and servicing information for the new 100W VHF transceiver. This

1-13

Page 20

GENERAL INFORMATION

transceiver includes an additional PA deck on the back which contains a new 100W PA board.

New Display Controller Board

A running change is being made to a new display controller board. The new board uses a different microcontroller and allows the control head operating software to be re-Flashed through the front panel microphone jack. Information for the earlier board is included in the Early_Bds folder on the CD-ROM.

Handheld Control Unit

A Handheld Control Unit is now available. This control unit has all user controls and the display in a compact unit similar in size to a microphone. It replaces the standard remote control unit in remote mount applications. An external speaker is required because it does not have an internal speaker. An optional junction box is available that has jacks for earphone/microphone, line out, speaker out, and transceiver programming. Installation, operation, and servicing information for this control unit are included in this manual.

Siren

A siren option is now available that operates with the 5300 transceiver. The transceiver microphone is used for the siren PA function, and receive audio can be routed through the siren loudspeaker and the volume controlled by the transceiver volume switch. In addition, the siren controller backlight is controlled by the transceiver.

• A Hardware Key Sele ct option switch in now

programmable with SecureNet encryption. This switch allows the hardware keys to be manually selected.

• The transceiver can now be programmed so that a

password must be entered at power-up to make the transceiver operational. This prevents unauthorized use.

Specifications (Page 1-8)

Clarified 800 MHz frequency range.

Backlight

Clarified viewing angle adjust procedure.

Setting Squelch

The squelch can now be adjusted by keypad

programming.

Scanning

Off-Hook Scanning - W ith models manufactured in late 2000 or after, scanning halts with a microphone off-hook condition.

Standard Mode Scan Lists SmartZone scan lists are now user programmable.

Nuisance Channel Add/Delete SmartZone channels, channels can also be permanently added or deleted.

- SMARTNET/

To provide siren control, a siren control pigtail cable must be installed in the transceiver. To accommodate this cable, J6 has been added to the logic board (Revision 6 or later) and J201 has been added to the interface board. Installation information for the siren controller is included in this manual.

New Feature

s (see Section 3)

• A Selective Squelch option switch can now be

programmed with conventional analog and digital (P25) operation. This switch allows the CTCSS/ DCS/NAC code to be selected from a preprogrammed list.

Project 25 Features

Individual, Group, and NAC Codes - The NAC 293 code functions like any other code. If it is programmed, all NACs are not ignored and the squelch opens only if it is detected.

Monitor Mode

When not scanning, briefly pressing or pressing and holding the Monitor switch always monitors the channel on which the transmission will occur. When scanning, briefly pressing this switch monitors that channel, and pressing and holding it moni-

1-14

Page 21

GENERAL INFORMATION

tors the current scanned channel which may be different.

Taking the microphone off-hook disables scanning with models manufactured in late 2000 or later (unless off-hook detection has been disabled by programming).

Standard Group Calls

Receiving a Standard Group Call - When a SMAR TNET/SmartZone group call is received, the transceiver can be programmed to briefly display the Individual ID of the calling mobile.

Interconnect Schematics

Interconnect schematics on pages 8-4 and 8-28, corrected accessory pigtail cable error (near J100/ P101).

800 MHz PA Board Schematic

In the lower left corner, power on-off transistor Q513 was incorrectly labeled Q500. Also, in the lower center, 8V Regulator U506, pin numbers 2 and 3 were reversed. Added R604 and R605 on U504 output.

Logic Board (Revision 3)

Top View (in Early_Bds

folder on the CD-ROM)

In the upper right, U9 pin numbering was off by 90 degrees. In addition, in the center, J9 pin numbers 1 and 2 were reversed (27 and 28 are correct).

1-15

Page 22

SECTION 2 INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION

2.1 IMPORTANT DIGITAL RADIO INSTALLATION INFORMATION

2.1.1 INTRODUCTION

NOTE: If audio holes or a “warbling” sound is heard in received signals, the cause may be excessive electrical noise in the vehicle transmitting the message. Refer to the following for more information.

With digital radios such as the EFJohnson 5300, electrical noise on the DC power input is not the typical noise heard with analog radios such as alternator whine. Instead, it causes audio holes (missing parts of words) or a “warbling” sound in messages received from a radio in a vehicle that has this problem.

Much of this electrical noise is caused by improper radio installation techniques. Observing the following installation guidelines normally eliminates this problem. If it does not, it is recommended that the vehicle be checked by a dealer for defective components such the fuel pump, alternator, battery, control computer, or lights. If noise is still a problem, try installing a noise filter such as the EFJohnson 17Ampere In-Line Noise Filter, Part No. 517-2003-017 (for standard power radios only).

2.1.2 INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

NOTE: For proper digital radio operation, the noise level at the battery and power connector of the radio

should be 50 mV or less when measured by an oscilloscope.

• Connect both wires of the power cable (standard

power models) or the red power cable (high power models) directly to the vehicle battery (see photo which follows). Use a minimum length of cable.

• Do not connect the power cable to a switched power

source such as a kill switch because de-affiliation and proper saving of some parameters then does not occur at power off. Use the ignition sense line to switch power as described in “ACCESSORY CABLE INSTALLATION” on page 2-8. Current drain in the off mode with this configuration is only about 0.75 mA with standard models and 2.25 mA with 100-watt models.

• Do not route the power cable and coaxial cable in

the same bundle except when required such as to get through a firewall. Keep this type of routing short and close to the radio. Do not coil up extra power cable and attach it to other wires or coaxial cable. Use only the minimum length of cable required.

• Mount the antenna on the roof or center of the trunk

lid and at least 5 feet from other antennas. Do not mount it on a light bar, next to a vi deo camera, or on a small “L” bracket on the fender lip.

• Do not use adapters to connect the antenna to the

Type N antenna jack of the radio. Change the antenna connector to the correct type if required.

CORRECT

Splices should be made by wrapping the wires together and then soldering the connection. Insulate the splice with electrical tape or heat shrink tubing.

2-1

Page 23

CORRECT

INSTALLATION

Radio Power Cable

INCORRECT

Solder ring terminal to wire and attach it directly to battery clamp bolt

DO NOT use butt splice connectors like these!

NOTE: Butt splice connectors, if included in the kit, are intended for other applications.

DO NOT make excessive splices.

Use a maximum of one splice per wire.

2-2

Page 24

INSTALLATION

(Must be Connected)

Item

No.

1 Amplified dynamic mic 250-0740-310 7 Self-drilli ng screw (4) 575-9077-565 2 Screw, 4-20 x 5/8” thread frmg (3) 575-5604-020 8 Knob (4) 547-0016-003 3 Screw, 4-24 x 1/4” sheet metal (3) 575-3604-008 9 Power cable (22') and hardware 023-9750-010 4 Microphone hanger clip 023-3514-001 10 Accessory wire and hardware 023-9750-011 5 Mic hanger ground wire 023-7171-911 11 5" rem ote speaker 250-0151-006 6 Transceiver mounting bracket 017-2226-034

Description Part No.

Item

No.

Description Part No.

Figure 2-1 Front Mount Installation Components

2.2 GENERAL INFORMATION

settings or damage the transceiver. Therefore, it is good practice to check transceiver performance before

2.2.1 SCOPE OF INSTRUCTIONS

it is placed in service.

Since each installation is somewhat unique, the following installation instructions are intended only as a general guide to installing this transceiver. Described

2.2.3 TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

are the intended use of the mounting hardware and the electrical connections that should be made.

The transceiver needs to be programmed before it

is placed in service unless it was ordered as factory

2.2.2 PERFORMANCE TESTS

programmed. Programming instructions are located in Section 4. Transceivers not factory programmed are

Although each transceiver is carefully aligned and tested at the factory, shipment can alter these

shipped programmed with test channels and other factory test parameters.

2-3

Page 25

INSTALLATION

2.2.4 POWER SOURCE

NOTE: The ignition sense line must be connected as described in Section 2.5.2 for power up to occur.

This transceiver is designed for installation only in vehicles which have a 12-volt, negative ground electrical system. This type of electrical system has the negative battery terminal connected directly to the vehicle chassis. Other types of electrical systems require a voltage converter, and external functions such as ignition sense and horn alert may require a special interface.

2.3 TRANSCEIVER INSTALLATION (FRONT

AND REMOTE MOUNT)

2.3.1 MOUNTING CONFIGURATIONS

Models of this transceiver are available for the following installation configurations:

Front Mount - The control unit is part of the transceiver, so the transceiver must be installed within reach of the operator.

Remote Mount - The control unit is a separate assembly which can be installed up to 17 feet from the transceiver which has a blank front panel (see Figure 2-2).

Dual Control - The remote control unit is connected to a front-mount transceiver. This allows the transceiver to be controlled from both the transceiver front panel and the remote control unit. The displays on the transceiver and control unit indicate identical information.

Dual Remote - Two remote control units are connected to a remote mount transceiver. This allows the transceiver to be mounted remotely from both control units. The displays on the control units indicate identical information.

2.3.2 SELECTING A MOUNTING LOCATION

Front-mount transceivers are designed for mounting in a location near the operator such as the dash, console, or transmission hump. Remote-mount transceivers are designed for mounting in an out-ofthe-way location such as the trunk.

WARNING

The mounting location of the transceiver or control unit can affect safe operation of the vehicle. Follow these precautions when installing this transceiver:

• Mount it where it does not interfere with operation

of the vehicle controls and where the operator can easily see the display and reach the controls.

• Mount it where it is least likely to cause additional

injury in case of an accident.

• Air bags deploy with great force. Therefore, do not

mount a transceiver or control unit anywhere near the deployment area or place any other objects in the deployment area.

2.3.3 MOUNTING KITS

The following kits may be used to install this transceiver. Components in these kits are shown in Figures 2-1, 2-2, and 2-5.

Std Cable and Hardware Kit, Part No. 023-9750-010

Includes a 22-foot power cable, microphone hanger and ground wire, splice connectors, and all the hardware (such as screws) that is normally required for installation.

100W Cable and Hardware Kit, P.N. 023-5315-100

Includes a heavy-duty 20-foot power cable, microphone hanger and ground wire, and all hardware (such as screws) that is normally required for installation.

Std Transceiver Mounting Kit, Part No. 023-9750-012

Includes a transceiver mounting bracket, four knobs, and mounting screws.

100W Transceiver Mounting Bracket, Part No.

017-9700-008/009 Mounting bracket designed for the 100W radio with extended heat sink. The early -009 bracket can be attached to the bottom of the radio only, and the revised -008 bracket can be attached to the top or bottom to permit dash or overhead mounting.

Accessory Wire Kit, Part No. 023-9750-011

Includes a wire assembly that is used to connect the ignition sense input and accessories.

2-4

Page 26

INSTALLATION

Powe r

Cable

22 ft.

Not Used

17 ft.

Control

Cable

Antenna

y Wires

2 or 22 ft.

Accessor

To Ign Sense

(Must Be Connected)

Speaker

Wires

Optional External Speaker

15A

Accessory Pigtail

Remote

Pigtail

Item

No.

Description Part No.

Item

No.

Remote Control

Unit

Description Part No.

1 Amplified dynamic microphone 250-0740-310 8 Knob, transceiver (4) 547-0016-003 2 Screw, 4-20 x 5/8” thread formg (3) 575-5604-020 9 Power cable (22 ft.) and hardware 023-5315-100 3 Screw, 4-24 x 1/4” sheet metal (3) 57 5-3604-008 10 Accessory wire and hardware 023-9750-011 4 Microphone hanger clip 023-3514-001 11 5” 15W 3.2-ohm external speaker 250-0151-006 5 Mic hanger ground wire 023-7171-911 12 Plastic washer (2) 596-6400-015 6 Transceiver mounting bracket 017-2226-050 13 Stainless steel spring washer (2) 596-9260-001 7 Self drilling screw, 1.25” long 14 Knob, control unit (2) 032-0792-015

Transceiver 1/4” 575-9077-565 15 Control unit mounting bracket 017-222 6-050 Control unit #10 575-9077-545 16 Control cable, 17 ft. 597-2002-262

Figure 2-2 Standard Remote Mount Installation Components

2-5

Page 27

INSTALLATION

2.3.4 MOUNTING STANDARD POWER TRANSCEIVER

Proceed as follows to mount a standard power

front or remote mount transceiver:

1. Check the area underneath the selected mounting

area for wiring, brake and gas lines, or other components that could be damaged when the mounting bracket is installed. Then install the mounting bracket using the included self-drilling screws or other screws if desired.

2. Ins tall the transceiver in the bracke t using the

included knobs.

3. With front-mount transceivers, install the micro-

phone hanger in a convenient location using the screws for sheet metal or plastic. The hanger must be connected to chassis ground for proper operation of functions such as monitoring and scan. If required, ground the hanger using the included ground wire.

2.3.5 MOUNTING 100W TRANSCEIVER

on the bottom only (because the one set of mounting holes are offset), so it is intended for floor mounting. However, the -008 bracket has two sets of mounting holes to allow either top or bottom installation, so it can also be used for dash or overhead mounting. Refer to Figure 2-3 and proceed as follows to mount a 100W front or remote mount transceiver:

1. Check the area underneath the selected mounting area for wiring, brake and gas lines, or other components that could be damaged when the mounting bracket is installed. Then install the mounting bracket using the included self-drilling screws or other screws if desired.

2. Mount the transceiver in the mounting bracket using the screws shown in Figure 2-3.

3. If applicable, install the microphone hanger as described in the preceding section.

2.4 POWER CABLE INSTALLATION

NOTE: As described in Section 2.1, it is recommended that the power cable be connected directly to the vehicle battery, and to an unswitched power source so that it de-affiliates when power is turned off.

8-32 x 5/16”

Screws

10-32 x 3/8”

Screws and Washers

Figure 2-3 100W Transceiver Mounting

Bracket

A longer bracket is required to install 100-watt transceivers because they have an extended heat sink. The -009 bracket is being replaced by the -008 bracket (see Section 2.3.3). The -009 bracket can be installed

2.4.1 STANDARD MODELS (ALL EXCEPT 100W)

Refer to Figures 2-1 or 2-2 and proceed as

follows:

1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery to

prevent damage from accidental short circuits.

2. Route the red and blue power cables to the battery.

T o min imize the chance of a short circ uit occurring in the unfused portion of the cable, make sure the fuseholder is connected as close as possible to the positive battery terminal.

3. As described in Section 2.1, if there is excess cable,

cut it to length. It may also be necessary to cut the cable if it must be routed through an opening that is not large enough to clear the fuseholder. Splice the wires by tightly wrapping them together and then soldering the connection (do not use a butt splice connector). Insulate the connection using electrical tape or heat shrink tubing.

2-6

Page 28

Non-Insulated Ring Terminal

To Chassis Gnd

3-Ft. Blk Cable

20-Ft Red Cable

Fuse Cable Assembly

INSTALLATION

35-Amp Max

Blade-Type Fuse

To Transceiver

Figure 2-4 100W Transceiver Power Cable Components

4. Connect the red power cable to the positive (+) terminal of the battery.

5. Connect the blue cable to the negative (–) battery terminal.

6. Plug the power cable into the transceiver and reconnect the negative battery cable.

7. Ins tall the antenna according to the manufacturer's instructions (see Section 2.1). Check VSWR. Reflected power should be less than 4% of forward power (VSWR less than 1.5 to 1).

2.4.2 100W MODELS

Refer to Figure 2-4 and the preceding guidelines

and proceed as follows:

Insulated Ring

Solder and Insulate

Connection

Terminal To

Battery (+)

lated ring terminal to this end using a suitable crimping tool and then solder the connection. Attach this ring terminal to the positive (+) battery terminal.

4. As described in Section 2.1, cut the red power cable from the transceiver to length and then splice it to the fuse cable by tightly wrapping the wires and then soldering the connection (do not use a butt splice connector). Insulate the connection using electrical tape or heat shrink tubing.

5. The 3-foot black cable at the transceiver end is connected to a chassis ground point. Locate a bolt or other chassis member that provides a good ground return to the negative battery terminal and then clean the area to ensure good contact. Cut the black cable to length, attach the included uninsulated ring terminal by crimping and soldering, and then attach it to chassis ground.

1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery to prevent damage from accidental short circuits.

2. Route the red power cable to the vehicle battery.

3. Locate the included fuse cable and strip 1/2” of insulation from the battery end. Attach the included insu-

6. Plug the power cable into the transceiver and reconnect the negative battery cable.

7. Install the antenna according to the manufacturer's instructions (see preceding guidelines). Check VSWR. Reflected power should be less than 4% of forward power (VSWR less than 1.5 to 1).

2-7

Page 29

Pin Function

Ext/Int Spkr Out

Ext Speaker Out

Internal Spkr In

Aux B/Horn Out

Ground

5 6

Ign Sense In Ext PA

7 8

Aux B In

INSTALLATION

Figure 2-5 Accessory Jack

2.5 ACCESSORY CABLE INSTALLATION

NOTE: The accessory cable ignition sense input must be connected for the transceiver to power up. Also, a speaker jumper may need to be installed to enable the internal speaker. Refer to the following for more information.

2.5.1 GENERAL

Accessory Cable Kit, Part No. 023-9750-011, is standard and is used for connecting such things as the ignition sense line and external speaker to the accessory pigtail coming from the back of the transceiver.

T wo 8-pin connectors are included in this kit. One has a jumper installed from pin 1 to 3 for routing audio back into the internal speaker (see Section 2.7) and the other does not have any wires installed. Also included are two 22-foot and three 2-foot wires with attached pins that can be used as required. Refer to Figure 2-5 and install this cable as described in the following information.

2.5.2 IGNITION SENSE INPUT (PIN 6)

NOTE: As previously described, the ignition sense line must be connected to a switched or unswitched power source for the transceiver to power up.

This ignition sense line is pin 6 of the accessory connector, and it is connected using an included wire assembly. When the ignition sense input is connected to a source switched by the vehicle ignition switch, it provides the following functions.

1. Power automatically turns on and off with the

ignition switch.

2. A turn-off delay can be programmed (see Section 3)

which may prevent accidental discharge of the vehicle battery if the transceiver is left on for extended periods (1 or 2 days). Standby current (power on, receiver squelched) is approximately 600 mA.

If these features are not used and transceiver power is to be controlled by the front-panel power switch only , the ignition sense input can be connected to an unswitched source.

2.5.3 SPEAKER PINS (PINS 1, 2, 3)

Refer to Section 2.7 for speaker installation information.

2-8

Page 30

INSTALLATION

2.5.4 AUXILIARY B OUT (PIN 4)

General

This output can be programmed for one of the following functions. The enabled condition is a low output and the disabled condition is a high impedance state. Maximum sink current is approximately 1.0 ampere, so a driver circuit may be required.

The Auxiliary B output is connected using one of the wires included in the accessory wire kit. Insert the pin of the wire assembly into the pin 4 slot of the connector as shown in Figure 2-5. Then connect the other end to the external device.

Horn Alert

NOTE: The horn alert feature is available only in l ater models with ARM firmware, Version 1.19 or later (and all Version 2.x and 3.x firmware).

To utilize the horn alert, a Horn option switch, Cadence Style, and Auxiliary B Horn output must be programmed. Refer to Section 4.7 of the operating manual (see Section 3) and the programming manual referenced in Section 4 for more information. (The Aux B output is programmed on page 2 of the Global screen.)

Siren Backlight

The “Backlight” function of the Auxiliary B output is programmed when the optional siren is used. The siren control head backlight then turns on and off with the radio control head backlight. A separate siren control pigtail cable is installed and provides the Auxiliary B output signal to the siren controller (pin 4 of the accessory connector is not used).

Site Trunking

The “Site Trunking” function of the Auxiliary B output provides an external indication such as a light when site trunking is occurring. This function is available with SmartZone and P25 trunked operation, and it requires PCConfigure Version 1.24 or later and radio firmware Version 2.4.x/3.4.x or later (it is not available with 1.x.x ARM firmware).

2.5.5 EXTERNAL PUBLIC ADDRESS (PIN 7)

An external public address system can be connected to pin 7 of the accessory connector. The PA option switch is required to control this feature. In the public address mode, microphone audio is always routed to the PA system, and the transceiver can be programmed so that receive audio is also routed. This is a low-level output, so some type of amplifier is required.

When the horn alert sounds, pin 4 of the accessory connector goes low. If a relay is used, a diode should be connected across the relay coil with the cathode toward the battery side. This protects Q6 on the logic board from the voltage spike produced when the relay de-energizes. A horn circuit example is shown in Figure 2-6.

nroH elciheV

hctiwS

V31+

elc

iheV

nro

yaleR

Figure 2-6 Horn Circuit Example

2.5.6 AUXILIARY B INPUT (PIN 8)

This input can be programmed for the following functions. This input is activated by a high voltage and deactivated by a low voltage or no signal (high impedance).

External Emergency Switch

When this function is programmed, an emergency condition can be triggered using an external emer-

esuF

noitceto

(

edoiD

)V31+ ot edohtaC

gency switch such as a foot-operating type.

yrettaB morF V31+

PA Broadcast

This function is used with the optional Transit

iP oT

oidaR fo 4 n

elbaC yrosseccA

Bus PA system to allow an external public address select switch to be used instead of the normal front panel option switch.

2-9

Page 31

INSTALLATION

2.6 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT INSTALLATION

NOTE: Refer to Section 2.11 for handheld control unit installation information.

2.6.1 GENERAL

The remote control configurations that may be

used are as follows:

Single Remote - A remote control unit is connected to the remote mount radio (without operating controls). This configuration is shown in Figure 2-2.

Single Remote, Dual Controls - A remote control unit is connected to the front mount radio. This allows control from both the radio front panel and the remote control unit. This configuration is a combination of Figures 2-1 and 2-2.

Dual Remotes - Two remote control units are connected to a remote mount radio. This allows control from both remote control units. With this configuration, a second remote control unit pigtail is used. One pigtail is connected to J6 on the logic board and the other to J1. This configuration is similar to Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-8. Compare the parts layout of your board to these illustrations to determine which board you have. The setup information which follows covers both configurations.

Revised Audio PA Board

There are also two different audio PA boards in use. Beginning in mid 2003, an revised version began shipping that has a 5-pin connector for connecting to the controller board. Previous versions were hardwired to the controller board using separate wires. In addition, the revised version has some circuit changes that affect how S1-2 is set. The setup information which follows covers both configurations.

Before installing the remote control units in the vehicle, check operation. If volume control is not operating as desired, some DIP switches inside the control unit may need to be reconfigured. Refer to the next section for more information.

NOTE: With dual control or remotes, for system power to turn off, the Power switches of both

control units must be off. Since the selected mode is not indicated by the push button switch, it is recommended that only one control unit be used to switch power.

2.6.2 CONTROL UNIT BOARD VERSIONS

Revised Controller Board

There are two different display controller boards in use. Beginning in late 2001, a revised version started shipping that utilizes only DIP switches for programming. The earlier board used both DIP switches and jumpers. The new revised board is shown in Figure 2-7 and the early board is shown in

Figure 2-7 Revised Display Controller Board

R759

W702

R756

R758

W705

J702

OFF

W703

W701

W704

Figure 2-8 Unrevised Display Controller Bd

2-10

Page 32

Table 2-1 Control Unit DIP Switch S1 Settings

INSTALLATION

Configuration

(see Section 2.6.1)

Master/Slave Setting

(S1-8/S1-9) [1]

Volume Co ntrol Setting

S1-2 [2]

Front mount transceiver only Master* Don’t Care Remote control unit, single control

Standard internal speaker used Master* On* [5] Optional external speaker used Master* Don’t Care [6]

Dual control, standard configuration [3]

Front mount transceiver control unit Master* Don’t Care Remote control unit Slave On* [5]

Dual control, alternate configuration [4]

Front mount transceiver control unit Slave Don’t Care Remote control unit Master* Don’t Care [6]

Dual Remotes, internal speakers used

Remote control unit 1 (either ctrl unit) Master* On* [5] Remote control unit 2 (other ctrl unit) Slave On* [5]

Dual Remotes, one internal/one external speaker used

Control unit controlling ext speaker Master* Don’t Care [6] Remote control unit w/internal speaker Slave On* [5]

Handheld Control Unit, Dual Controls,

(HHC + front mt radio, single int/ext spkr avail.)

Volume Controlling Unit Master* N/A/Don’t Care Other Ctrl Unit Slave N/A/Don’t Care

Handheld Control Unit, Dual Remotes

(HHC + remote control unit, two speakers avail.)

HHC (controls external speaker) Master* N/A Remote control unit (controls internal spkr) Slave On* [5]

* - Default setting, no change usually required. [1] Master = S1-8 Off/S1- 9 On; Slave = S1-8 On/S1-9 Off [2] S1-3 is always On and S1-10 is always Off. With the revised display controller board (Figure 2-7), set using

DIP switches S1-2, 3, and 10. With the unrevised display controller board (Figure 2-8), set using jumper resistors R756 (S1-2), R758 (S1-3), and R759 (S1-10). “On” = Jumper In, “Off” = Jumper Out.

[3] The volume of each internal speaker is controlled independently by the local volume control. If an external

speaker is used, it is controlled by the front mount transceiver and the radio internal speaker is inactive.

[4] This configuration allows an external speaker to be controlled by the remote control unit. However, both

internal speakers and the volume control of the front mount transceiver are then inactive. [5] With unrevised audio PA board (see Section 2.6.4), S1-2 must be Off. [6] When a remote control unit controls an external speaker and the internal speaker is not used, disable the inter-

nal speaker by disconnecting the internal PA board from the display controller board (see Section 2.6.4).

2-11

Page 33

INSTALLATION

Accessing Jumpers

The jumpers on the controller board are configured as described in the following information and in Table 2-1. If the default configuration must be changed, this board is accessed as follows:

1. Remove the back cover of the remote control unit.

The audio P A board is the top board, followed by the display controller board, and then the display board.

2. To temporarily move the audio PA board out of the

way to access the display controller board, release it from the housing by pressing the two plastic clips on the bottom edge.

2.6.3 SETTING MASTER/SLAVE SWITCHES

With two control units, the control unit designated as the Master controls the external or front mount radio speaker. Switches 8 and 9 of DIP switch S1 on the display controller board (see Figure 2-7 or 2-8) set the Master/Slave configuration of the control unit as follows. This switches function the same on both boards. Set these switches as indicated in Table 2-1 if applicable.

Master = Sw 8 Off, Sw 9 On (default) Slave = Sw 8 On, Sw 9 Off

mounting bracket, 17-foot control cable, and mounting hardware are included. Proceed as follows:

1. Check the area behind the selected mounting location to make sure that there is nothing that will be damaged when the mounting screws are installed. Then install the mounting bracket using the included self-drilling screws or others if desired.

2. Install the control unit in the bracket using the included plastic washers, spring washers, and knobs as shown in Figure 2-2.

3. Install the microphone hanger in a convenient location using the included screws for sheet metal or plastic as applicable. The hanger must be connected to chassis ground for proper operation of functions such as monitoring and scan. If required, ground the hanger using the included grounding wire.

4. Route the control cable from the transceiver to the control unit and plug it into both as shown in Figure 2-2. With dual remotes, there are two remote pigtails coming from the back of the radio.

2.7 CONNECTING THE SPEAKER

2.7.1 USING STANDARD INTERNAL SPEAKER

2.6.4 CONFIGURING VOLUME CONTROL

S1-2, 3, and 10 select the volume control mode. These switches can almost always be left in the default mode (S1-2 and 3 = On, S1-10 = Off). Additional information follows.

• If controlling an external speaker and the internal

speaker is not used, disable the internal speaker by disconnecting the control unit audio PA board from the controller board.

• If controlling the local internal speaker when

equipped with the unrevised audio PA board (hardwired to controller board), S1-2 = Off or R756 Out.

2.6.5 MOUNTING REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

A diagram showing a remote transceiver installation is located in Figure 2-2. The control unit

CAUTION

The audio amplifier in the transceiver is designed to withstand momentary grounding of the speaker outputs. However, do not connect either speaker output to supply voltage because serious damage will result.

Front Mount Transceiver jumper from pin 1 to 3 into the accessory jack (see Figure 2-5). This routes the audio on pin 1 back in to the internal speaker connected to pin 3. The other internal speaker terminal is internally connected to pin 2.

Remote Control Unit the internal speaker in the control unit is used, and no special connections are required. Low level audio from the control cable is routed to a 3-watt audio amplifier in the control unit. The use of a separate amplifier permits independent volume control in dual control applications and also minimizes noise.

- Insert the plug with the

- In the standard configuration,

2-12

Page 34

INSTALLATION

NOTE: The two wires on the transceiver end of the control cable are not used in this application, so they should remain unconnected.

2.7.2 USING AN OPTIONAL EXTERNAL

SPEAKER

If an optional external speaker is used, it should be a 4-ohm, 15-watt speaker such Part No. 250-0151006 shown in Figure 2-1 or 2-2. Proceed as follows to connect this speaker:

1. The external speaker is connected to pins 1 and 2 of

the accessory connector shown in Figure 2-5 (the order is not important). If installing the -006 speaker, pins are already installed on the speaker wires. Locate the connector included in the accessory wire kit that does not have pins 1 and 3 jumpered and insert one pin into the pin 1 location and the other into the pin 2 location.

2. If installing some other speaker, use the 2- or 22-

foot wire assemblies included in the accessory wire kit as required.

2.8 KEY CAP INSTALLATION

Key Cap Kit, Part No. 587-5300-001, is included with each transceiver. This kit includes keys labeled as follows and six plugs that can be inserted in the front panel if keys are not used. The caps indicated by an asterisk ( * ) are installed at the factory.

EMER* BKLHT* DISP* SEL SQ* SCAN* TONES* C/S TG SEL TX PWR CALL MON RWS PRI ED ALERT RESP MSG RTA PHONE STATUS HOME SCN ED PROG SEARCH LOCK F1 F2 OTAR KY CHG KY CLR PUB AD HORN KY SEL DATA SN LST SQ LST SURVLC TN VOL CH SEL PW CHG RWS ED

Determine the function of each key and then install the applicable key cap. To remove a key cap, gently pull it out of the front panel with a wide-nose pliers or use the extraction tool included in the DC power cable kit. This kit is for the standard front or remote control unit only. The handheld control unit key caps cannot be changed.

2.9 PIGTAIL CABLES

NOTE: In dual control/remote applications, this speaker can be controlled by either the transceiver or remote control unit. Refer to Table 2-1 and Section 2. 6 for information on how to set up the control unit for each configuration.

The various accessory pigtail cables that may be installed in the radio are listed in Table 2-2. This table indicates the internal logic board connector it plugs into and the external connector it provides.

Table 2-2 53xx Mobile Pigtail Cable Guide

Connectors Provided By Cable

To Radio

Cable Part Number

Logic Bd

Connector

Accessory Std w/EMI board

Remote 1/Acc 597-2002-249 J6, J7, P101 X X Remote 2 597-2002-251 J1 X Dual Remote 597-2002-283 J1, J6 X X UDDI 597-2002-24 5 J5, J8 X Acc/PVP

Audio Serial Data 597-2002-282 J12 X Siren 597-2002-231 J11, P102 X [1] Uses front mount control head connector so this cable cannot be used with front mount radios.

597-2002-230 023-5300-630

597-2002-280 J5, J7, J8,

J7, P101 X

P101

Acces-

sory

8-pin

Remote 1

DB15 F

Remote 2

DB15 F

UDDI

DB25 F

PVP

Audio

DB25 F

Serial

Data

DB9 F

Siren 8-pin

2-13

Page 35

INSTALLATION

Figure 2-9 Locking Tray Installation Diagram

2.10 TRANSCEIVER MOUNTING TRAY INSTALLATION

2.10.1 DESCRIPTION

Optional Transceiver Locking Tray, Part No. 5857000-185, is a lockable mounting bracket for 5300 and other transceivers that use the standard chassis (it is not intended for 100W models with the extended chassis). This bracket provides theft protection and also allows the transceiver to be quickly removed from the vehicle with a key .

2.10.2 INSTALLATION

Refer to Figure 2-9 and proceed as follows:

1. Install the transceiver in bracket MP2 using the four

10-32 x 1/2” screws (HW2) included. If desired, this

mounting bracket can be used to mount the transceiver directly to the vehicle.

2. Install lock bracket MP1 using the four self-drilling screws (HW3) and washers (HW5) included. Make sure that there is nothing under the mounting location that will be damaged.

2.10.3 LOCKING/UNLOCKING TRANSCEIVER

To insert the transceiver with attached mounting bracket into the locking bracket, set it over the locking bracket and push it rearward slightly if necessary so that it seats. Then pull it forward until it latches. The lock operates in a manner similar to most glove compartment locks. To release the transceiver, press the button and at the same time push the transceiver rearward. The key locks the button so that it cannot be pressed.

2-14

Page 36

Yel/Orn

INSTALLATION

Blk

Prog Jack

Spkr Out Jack

Junction Box

Ctrl Unit Jack

Line Out Jack

P.N. 023-5300-130

Earphone/Mic Jack

Figure 2-10 HHC Installation Components (Optional Junction Box Used)

2.11 HANDHELD CONTROL UNIT INSTALLATION

2.11.1 GENERAL

The Handheld Control Unit replaces the standard control unit and DTMF microphone in remote mount applications. It does not contain an internal speaker, so an external speaker must be used. This control unit plugs directly into the remote control unit pigtail cable on the back of the transceiver or into an optional junction box. This junction box provides the following additional jacks (see Figure 2-10).

Speaker Out Jack - Output for connecting an external speaker. When the junction box is not used, the speaker is connected to the accessory pigtail of the transceiver.

Part No. 597-2002-267

Ctrl Cable

Jack

Line Out Jack - Connection point for a tape recorder or some other device. The output signal at this jack is 1V P-P, 600-ohm (nominal), and consists of composite receive and transmit audio.

Earphone/Microphone Jack - A three-conductor jack for connecting a combination earphone and microphone. The external speaker audio is automatically muted when this jack is used. There is no PTT line associated with this jack, so the transmitter must still be keyed using the control unit PTT switch.

Programming Jack - A standard eight-pin jack for connecting the computer and RPI to program the transceiver.

NOTE: The junction box is required to program the transceiver when this control unit is used.

2-15

Page 37

INSTALLATION

Figure 2-11 HHC Installation Components (Junction Box Not Used)

2.11.2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Optional Junction Box Used (Figure 2-10)

1. Install the transceiver as described in Sections 2.2 to

2.5. Connect the microphone hanger to chassis ground as described.

2. Mount the junction box in a convenient location

near the control unit using the included mounting bracket and hardware.

3. Route the 17-ft. control cable from the transceiver to

the junction box as shown in Figure 2-10. Connect it between the remote pigtail of the transceiver and the male DB9 jack of the junction box.

4. The two wires coming from the connector on the

transceiver end of the control cable route speaker audio to the junction box. Insert the pins on these wires into the pins 1 and 2 slots of the accessory cable connector. NOTE: The accessory and siren

pigtail cables have the similar connectors. Be sure to connect to the black yellow/orange

siren connector.

accessory connector, not the

If a jumper has been connected between pins 1 and 3 on the accessory connector, remove it. A speaker can also be connected directly to pins 1 and 2 if desired. Refer to Section 2.7.2 for more information.

5. Plug the 4.0-ohm external speaker into the SPKR OUT jack of the junction box. Plug the control unit into the male DB9 connector of the junction box.

6. If applicable, connect the tape re corder or other device to the LINE OUT jack.

7. Connect the earphone or earphone/microphone to the EARPHONE/MIC jack (the external speaker automatically mutes when an earphone is connected to this jack). The earphone output is the “tip” of the jack and the microphone input is the “ring” (ground is the “sleeve”).

2-16

Page 38

INSTALLATION

Junction Box Not Used (Figure 2-11)

The Handheld Control Unit can be plugged directly into the remote pigtail of the transceiver in applications where the transceiver and control unit are located near each other.

In other applications where the transceiver is mounted remotely , optional 17-foot Control Cable, Part No. 597-2002-267, is required to connect the control unit to the transceiver. Proceed as follows:

1. Install the transceiver as described in Sections 2.2 to

2.5. Connect the microphone hanger to chassis ground as described.

2. Route the 17-ft. control cable from the remote

pigtail of the transceiver to the control unit as shown in Figure 2-11. Secure the connectors using the captive screws.

3. Connect the external speaker to pins 1 and 2 of the

accessory pigtail as described in step 4 of the preceding section.

2.11.3 USING HHC TO PROVIDE DUAL

CONTROLS OR DUAL REMOTES

One control unit must be designated the Maser and the other the Slave (see Section 2.6.3). The Master provides volume control. The other S1 switches should be left in the default configuration.

Dual Remote Configuration

Both the HHC and a remote control unit can be used to provide dual remote control units. The HHC is connected to one remote pigtail and the remote control unit is connected to the other. The HHC provides volume control of the external speaker and the remote control unit controls its local internal speaker.

The HHC is designated the Master and the remote control unit the Slave (see Section 2.6.3). The remote control unit volume control switches should be left in the default configuration (see Section 2.6.4).

2.11.4 TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING WITH

HHC

The programming setup used to program a transceiver equipped with the Handheld Control Unit is similar to that used with the standard control units. The programming cable is connected to the junction box using a special adapter. Refer to Section 4.1.4 for more information.

Dual Control Configuration

The handheld control unit can connected to a front mount transceiver to provide dual controls. However, operation in this configuration may not be suitable because only one speaker is available for both control units.

Either the internal speaker in the front mount radio or the external speaker connected to the accessory cable (see Section 2.7) or junction box can be used. Connecting both speakers in parallel is not recommended because the audio amplifier may become overloaded.

Only one transceiver programming parameter must be changed when the Handheld Control Unit is used. Set the “Controller Type” parameter on the Global screen of the PCConfigure programming software for “Handheld” instead of “Normal”.

4. There is also a DIP programming switch on the

handheld controller board. Generally, the ten switches of this switch should be left in the default position which is switches 2, 3, 6, and 9 “On”, and the others “Off”. The only time any of these switches may need to be changed is when the HHC is used in a dual control or dual remote configuration as described the preceding section.

2-17

Page 39

INSTALLATION

5300 TRANSCEIVER

SIREN AMPLIFIER

Controller

Connector

Siren 2

(8-pin)

(14-pin)

(In Trunk)

Alarm

Spkr Spkr Gnd +12V

Terminal Block or Connector (5-pin)

(In Trunk)

8-Pin Siren Connector (Yellow)

DC Power Cable

Antenna Cable

15-Pin D-Submin Connector To Control Unit

8-Pin Accessory Connector (Black)

1 Ft Horn Ring Wire

3 Ft Cable

(Part of Control Cable)

22 Ft Control Cable Assembly

Splice

20 Ft Power Red Cable

20 Ft Power Black Cable

20 Ft 2-Cond Cable

Splices

Siren

Loudspeaker

Figure 2-12 Siren Installation Diagram

(Green)

15A Fuse

Vehicle Battery

1 Ft Park/Kill Wire

(Black)

SIREN

CONTROLLER

(Under Dash)

2.12 SIREN OPTION INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

2.12.1 GENERAL

The 5300 Siren Kit, Part No. 250-5300-100, contains a siren amplifier, siren controller, and all the cables and hardware normally required to install this option. This kit connects to an E.F. Johnson 5300 mobile transceiver. The siren loudspeaker is optional, and the following models are available:

Part No. 585-5300-007 - Model TS100 for light bar

installation

Part No. 585-5300-009 - Model MS100 for compact

(behind grille) installation.

2.12.2 TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

For proper operation of the siren controller backlight, a transceiver programming parameter may need to be changed. On the Global screen of the PCConfigure programming software (see Section 4), set the “Auxiliary B Toggle” parameter for “Backlight”. The

Siren Control Head backlight then turns on and off with the transceiver control unit backlight.

2.12.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Refer to Figure 2-12 and proceed as follows:

1. Mount the siren amplifier near the transceiver (the connecting cable to the transceiver is approximately 3 feet long).

2. Mount the siren controller in the desired location (the connecting cable to the amplifier is approximately 22 feet long).

3. Mount the siren loudspeaker in the desired location (the connecting cable to the amplifier is approximately 20 feet long). Refer to the installation instructions included with the speaker for more information.

4. Connect the included 22-ft control cable assembly between the amplifier, transceiver , and controller as shown in Figure 2-12. Be sure to connect it to the

2-18

Page 40

INSTALLATION

yellow (or orange) 8-pin siren pigtail of the transceiver (not the black 8-pin accessory pigtail).

NOTE: It is recommended that the power cable be connected directly to the vehicle battery. Connection to other locations may result in excessive noise in the audio signal when using the PA function.

5. Connect the included fus eho lder to the positive (+) battery terminal using the included ring terminal or another connector as required.

6. Connect the included red cable from the +12V terminal on the amplifier to the fuseholder using the included solder splice connector. This connector contains internal solder that melts when heated sufficiently.

7. Connect the included black cable from GND

terminal on the amplifier to the negative (–) battery terminal using the included ring terminal or some other connector as required.

8. Connect the loudspeaker to the SPEAKER termi-

nals on the amplifier using the included 2-conductor cable and solder splice connectors (the order is not important).

9. If the siren is to be automatically disabled when the vehicle is in Park or Neutral, connect the black wire coming from the siren controller connector to the neutral safety switch.

10.If the vehicle horn is to sound with the siren, connect the green wire coming from the siren control head connector to the vehicle horn circuit.

2-19

Page 41

SECTION 3 OPERATION

3.1 GENERAL

The operation description for the 5300 mobile transceiver is included on the CD-ROM with this manual. To open this manual, click the following link or go to the Op_Man directory and open the file “5300_Man.pdf”.

Click here to go to the 5300 Operating Manual

OPERATION

3-1

Page 42

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

SECTION 4 TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

Remote Programming Interface (RPI)

Figure 4-1 Programming Setup (Standard Front/Remote Models)

4.1 GENERAL

4.1.1 PROGRAMMING SETUP

The following items are required to program the transceiver. The part numbers of this equipment are shown in Table 1-1 in Section 1. The programming setup is shown above.

• A Windows

-based computer (see next section)

• Remote Programming Interface (RPI), Part No.

023-5300-000

• Programming cable from RPI to transceiver (see

Section 4.1.3 for more information).

• EFJohnson PCConfigure programming software,

Part No. 023-9998-488.

Cable

Part No. 023-5300-000

Part No. 023-5300-005

Battery

• Windows 95/98/NT/2000 (3.1 cannot be used)

• Pentium

processor or equivalent

• 16 MB of RAM

• A hard disk drive with at least 5 MB of free space

• A CD-ROM drive

• An available serial port

4.1.3 CONNECTING COMPUTER TO TRANSCEIVER

NOTE: Only RPI, Part No. 023-5300-000, can be used to program the 5300-series transceiver. Other RPIs such as 023-9800-000 and 023-9750-000 are not compatible with this transceiver.

Connecting RPI To Computer

Antenna

Ign Sense

NOTE: The -005 cable, the -488 software, RPI, and a CD manual are included in the 5300 Series Programming Kit, Part No. 250-5000-004.

4.1.2 COMPUTER DESCRIPTION

The computer used to program this transceiver

should meet the following minimum requirements:

The Radio Programming Interface (RPI) provides the required logic interface between the computer and transceiver. The cable from the RPI to computer is not included with the RPI. The RPI has a female DB9 connector, and most computer serial ports have a male DB9 or DB25 connector. Therefore, a male DB9 to female DB9 or DB25 is usually required. This is a standard cable available at most computer supply

4-1

Page 43

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

stores or order 6 ft. DB9M to DB9F cable, Part No. 597-5900-002.

Connecting RPI To Transceiver

The programming setup for a front mount transceiver is shown in Figure 4-1. With transceivers that use the standard front or remote control unit, the cable from the RPI plugs into the microphone jack of the transceiver or control unit. This cable is Part No. 023-5300-005, and it is not included with the RPI. Connecting the programming setup to the handheld controller is described in the next section.

4.1.4 HANDHELD CONTROLLER

PROGRAMMING SETUP

When the Handheld Control Unit is used (see Section 3), the same computer, RPI, and programming cable are used as with the standard front and remote models. In addition, the following components are required:

• The junction box (Part No. 023-5300-130) is

required to provide a connection point for the RPI since the control unit does not have a programming jack. This box may not be included with some handheld control units.

• Adapter Plug, Part No. 023-5300-140, is required to

plug the 5300 programming cable into the rectangular 10-pin programming connector on the junction box (see following illustration).

4.1.5 SIREN PROGRAMMING

When the optional siren feature is installed (see Section 2.12), one transceiver programming parameter may need to be changed for proper operation of the siren controller backlight. On the Global screen of the PCConfigure programming software, set the “Auxiliary B Toggle” parameter for “Backlight”. The Siren Control Head backlight then turns on and off with the transceiver control unit backlight.

4.2 USING THE PCCONFIGURE SOFTWARE

The PCConfigure software is described in a separate CD-based manual included on the CD-ROM with this service manual and also the programming software. To open this manual, click the following link or go to the PCConfigure directory and open the file “Manual.pdf”.

Click here to go to the PCConfigure manual

To P ro g Ca bl e

Programming Adapter Plug

To Junction

Box

4-2

Page 44

SECTION 5 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

5.1 GENERAL TRANSCEIVER DESCRIPTION

5.1.1 INTRODUCTION

The E.F. Johnson 5300 is a microcontroller-based radio that uses a Digital Signal Processor (DSP) to provide the following modes of operation:

Narrowband Analog - FM modulation with a maximum deviation of 2.5 kHz. This mode is usually used in systems where the channel spacing is 12.5 kHz. Call Guard (CTCSS or DCS) subaudible squelch signaling can be used in this mode.

Wideband Analog - FM modulation with a maximum deviation of 5 kHz. This mode is usually used in systems where the channel spacing is 25 kHz or 30 kHz. Call Guard (CTCSS or DCS) subaudible squelch signaling can be used in this mode.

Project 25 Digital - The voice is digitized, error corrected, optionally encrypted and transmitted using C4FM modulation according to the Project 25 standard. This mode can be used in channel spacings of 12.5 kHz.

The DSP processes the received signals and generates the appropriate output signals. The microcontroller controls the hardware and provides an interface between hardware and DSP.

5.1.2 PC BOARDS

The 5300-series mobile contains the following PC board assemblies:

boards. It also contains the audio amplifier and volume control circuits for internal and external speakers.

Display Controller - Contains a microcontroller which provides an interface between the controller on the logic board and the front panel display and switches.

Display Board - Contains the liquid crystal display, option switch keypad, and display drivers. In addition, it contains the backlight for the display and keypad.

5.1.3 CIRCUIT PROTECTION (FUSES)

Circuit protection is provided as follows:

• A 15-ampere fuse (35-ampere with 100W mo dels)

in the power cable provides overall transceiver protection.

• A 2-ampere fuse on the RF board protects circuits

on that board.

• F1 (2-ampere) on the display controller board

protects the Sw B+ output of the microphone connector.

• F1 on the logic board protects the Sw B+ output of

universal interface connector J5.

• The various voltage regulators provide circuit

protection by automatically limiting current.

NOTE: The next two sections (5.1.4 and 5.1.5) describe operation with the revised logic (Version C in Section 1.12.2). Generally, the Digital IF chip on the revised RF board replaces the ABACUS chip on the early version, and the CODEC on the revised logic board replaces the ADSIC chip on the early version.

RF Board - Contains the receiver, synthesizer, and exciter sections.

PA Board - Contains the transmitter power amplifier, power control, and main DC power switching sections.

Logic Board - Contains the digital signal processing (DSP), control logic, and audio processing sections.

Interface Board - A small board that provides the electrical connections between the logic and RF/PA

5.1.4 ANALOG MODE DESCRIPTION

Receive Mode

The signal is routed from the antenna connector to the RF Board where it is filtered, amplified, and mixed with the first local oscillator frequency generated by the synthesizer. The resulting IF signal is also filtered and amplified and sent to the AD9864 digital IF chip.

5-1

Page 45

UHF RF BOARD (VERSION C)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The signal is then mixed with the second local oscillator frequency to create a second IF signal. The second IF signal is then sampled and downconverted to baseband. The baseband signal is then decimated to a lower sample rate that is selectable at 20 kHz. This signal is then routed via a serial interface from the IF chip to the DSP on the logic board.

On the logic board the DSP digitally filters the input signal and performs frequency discrimination to obtain the message signal. The DSP first performs a carrier- detection squelch function on the radio. If a signal is determined to be present, the audio port ion of the signal is resampled and then filtered appropriately. The filtered signal is then routed back to a D/A in the CODEC to produce an analog signal for output to the audio power amplifier and then the speaker. Any detected signaling information is decoded and the resulting information is sent to the microcontroller.

Transmit Mode

The signal from the microphone is amplified and then routed to the CODEC chip where it is first digitized and then sent to the DSP. The DSP performs the required filtering, adds the desired signaling, converts the sample rate and then sends the resulting signal back to a D/A in the CODEC to produce the analog modulation signals for the VCOs. The modulated VCO signal is then sent to the RF power amplifier and transmitted.

The resampled signal is then processed by a demodulator routine to extract the digital information. The resulting bit stream (9600 bps) is sent to a routine that performs unframing, error-correction, and voice decoding. The result of these operations is a reconstructed voice signal sampled at 8 kHz. The sampled voice signal is sent to a D/A in the CODEC to produce an analog signal for output to the audio power amplifier and speaker.

Transmit Mode

The microphone signal is processed as in the analog mode until it reaches the DSP. At this point the audio signal is processed by a voice encoding routine to digitize the information. The resulting samples are then converted to a bit stream that is placed into the proper framing structure and error protected. The resulting bit stream has a bit rate of 9600 Hz.

This bit stream in then encoded, two bits at a time, into a digital level corresponding to one of the four allowable frequency deviations. This produces 16-bit symbols with a rate of 4800 Hz. The symbols are resampled to a rate of 48 kHz and filtered to comply with channel bandwidth requirements. The filtered signal is then sent to a D/A in the CODEC to produce the analog modulation signal for the VCO. The modulated VCO signal is then mixed up to the final transmit frequency and then sent to the RF PA for transmission.

5.1.5 PROJECT 25 DIGITAL MODE

Introduction

In Project 25 Digital Mode, the carrier is modulated with four discrete deviation levels. These levels are ± 600 Hz and ± 1800 Hz. Digitized voice is created using an IMBE™ vocoder.

Receive Mode

The signal is processed in the same way as an analog mode transmission until after the squelch function is performed. If a signal is detected to be present, the DSP resamples the signal from 20 kHz to 24 kHz. This is done so that the sample rate is an integer multiple (5x) of the data rate of the digital modulation which is 4800 symbols/sec (9600 bits/sec).

IMBE™ voice coding technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

5.2 UHF RF BOARD (VERSION C)

NOTE: The following describes the new revised Version C RF board described in Section 1.12.1. The RF Board is not field serviceable. It must be replaced as a unit with a new board.

5.2.1 RECEIVER

Front End Bandpass Filter

A harmonic filter is followed by a PIN diode transmit/receive switch. Following the switch, two fixed tuned bandpass filters are used in the front-end of the receiver . Depending on the desired receive band, the appropriate filter is selected using RF switches (U37/U41). This filter provides first-image rejection with minimal loss in order to provide the desired level

5-2

Page 46

Antenna

Jack

Switch

Harmonic

Filter

Bandpass

Filters

380-444 MHz

(450-455 MHz)

444-470 MHz

(455-520 MHz)

T/R PIN

Switch

AT-267

Var Atten

Switch

Mitsubishi RA07M

Power Control

LNA Bypass

LNA

MGA-71543

RF2361

DRIVER

Sirenza SGA 6589

TX Pwr Control

UHF RF BOARD (VERSION C)

Bandpass

Filters

380-444 MHz

Switch

(450-455 MHz)

Switch

444-470 MHz

(455-520 MHz)

VCO

444 - 509 MHz

(455 - 520 MHz)

VCO

380 - 445 MHz

(391 - 456 MHz)

Switch

MIXER

64.455 MHz 15 KHz BW

ADEX-10L

ILR

BPF

PLL

SPI

IF Amp

MMBR941

16.8 MHz

64.455 MHz 15 KHz BW

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Receiver Back End

Fif = 2.1MHz

RF Out

AD9864

SPI

Low Frequency Modulation

High Frequency Modulation

RX Band Select

VCO Select

RX LNA Bypass

TX Pwr Control

62.355 MHz

1Kbit

EEPROM

8 ch 8 bit DAC

RF / Logic

Interface

SPI

Clk

SPI

MOSI

SPI

MISO

SPI

Addr1

SPI

SPI Addr

Addr2

SPI

Addr3

Clk

RF Out

Data

Frame

Sync Lock

Enable

Lock

Detect

nTxEna

nTxNap

TxMod2

TxMod1

Temp

Unswitched

Battery

3.3V

5.5V

Figure 5-1 UHF RF Board Block Diagram (Version C)

of receiver sensitivity. A variable attenuator, which follows the filter, increases the dynamic range of the receiver when receiving high-level signals.

Front End LNA and Bypass Switching

The Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) is critical in determining the overall noise figure of the receiver chain. An MGA-71543 amplifier (U39) provides optimum noise figure, gain, intercept point, and power consumption.

Post-LNA Bandpass Filters

Additional bandpass filters are positioned after the LNA. These filters are identical to the front-end filters previously described. RF switches U42 and U40 are used to select between the two bands. These filters provide additional image rejection.

Mixer and LO Filter

A double-balanced, low-level ADEX-10L mixer (MX1) with a LO drive level of +4 dBm is used for the

first conversion. This mixer provides good dynamic range with a 3 dB lower LO drive than the more traditional +7 dBm drive mixers. This reduces power consumption and also the conducted and radiated local oscillator leakage from the receiver.

For the low band UHF version, a high-side mix is used for the 380-444 MHz receive band and a low-side mix is used for the 444-470 MHz receive band. For the high band UHF version, a high-side mix is used for the 450-455 MHz receive band and a low-side mix is used for the 455-520 MHz receive band. This band plan reduces the tuning range requirements for the VCOs.

A LO filter is used prior to LO port of the mixer to reduce the impact of wideband noise from the LO synthesizer on the receiver sensitivity.

IF Filter and Amplifier

A two-pole 64.455 MHz crystal filter (U2) is used to provide the desired level of adjacent channel rejection while providing minimal amplitude and phase distortion within a 25 KHz bandwidth. Shields

5-3

Page 47

UHF RF BOARD (VERSION C)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

installed around the crystal filter provide sufficient isolation to meet the second image response specifications and minimize noise pickup by the impedancematching inductors (L1, L2, L3, L4 and L7.)

A transistor IF amplifier (Q1 and supporting circuitry) is required to boost the signal strength, thereby reducing the overall noise figure. The noise figure, signal gain, intercept point, and power consumption are optimized in this design. An additional two-pole 64.455 MHz crystal filter (U25) is used to increase the adjacent channel rejection. An LC circuit provides the required impedance matching between the output of the IF filter and the input of the backend chip (U11.)

Back End IC

An Analog Devices AD9864 IF Digitizing Subsystem IC (U11) provides a variety of functions for the receiver as follows:

Second Local Oscillator

- A varactor-tuned transistor (Q2) oscillator is phase-locked to a fixed frequency of 62.355 MHz for converting the first IF of 64.455 MHz to a second IF frequency of 2.1 MHz. Phase Locked Loop circuitry inside of the AD9864 operates with a phase-detector frequency of 15 kHz.

Second Conversion Mixer and Filtering

- A mixer

inside the AD9864 converts from the first IF of

64.455 MHz to the second IF of 2.1 MHz. External filters (L29 and L30) provide IF bandpass filtering. Additional filtering is provided by the inherent operation of the sigma-delta analog/digital converters.

Gain Control

- This device provides up to 12 dB of AGC range via a combination of analog and digital controls. Additionally, there is a 16 dB attenuator in the front end. The optimum settings are controlled by the host microprocessor.

Analog / Digital Conversion and Processing

Sigma-delta converters provide I and Q sampling directly from the second IF frequency. The resulting digital words are first filtered by internal programmable FIR filters and then clocked out of the AD9864 via a serial data bus using a programmable data rate.

5.2.2 SYNTHESIZER

PLL IC

A CX72301 sigma-delta modulated PLL (U29) forms the basis of the main synthesizer that is used for both receive and transmit modes. This PLL chip provides good phase noise capabilities to reduce adjacent channel interference and quick switching between the receive and transmit modes.

In receive mode the PLL is programmed for a local oscillator frequency that is 64.455 MHz away from the receive frequency. In transmit mode the PLL is programmed directly for the transmit frequency.

Reference Oscillator

A 16.8 MHz oscillator (Y1) is used as the frequency reference to the synthesizer and also to the receiver backend IC. The center frequency of this oscillator is corrected using a DC tuning voltage from the digital board during receive and voice and data modulation during transmit.

Analog Switches and PLL Loop Filters

An analog switch (U17) provides quicker switching of signals during channel changes by varying the time constant of the PLL loop filter.

VCOs

T wo different VCOs minimize the tuning range of the VCOs in order to meet phase noise specifications. Both VCO's (U1 and U5) are used for transmit and receive modes. Their combined tuning range covers the entire transmit and receive frequency bands. Transmit modulation is provided to each oscillator's modulation port from the digital board.

A RF2361 buffer amplifier (U6) provides the required level of drive for the receiver mixer's local oscillator signal as discussed above.

5.2.3 TRANSMITTER

Modulation

A “dual-port” modulation scheme is used in order to provide DC coupling of the signal required for data

5-4

Page 48

UHF RF BOARD (VERSION C)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Figure 5-2 RF Board Block Diagram (Version A/B)

modulation applications. Modulation applied to the PLL's frequency reference provides low-frequency modulation, whereas modulation applied to the PLL's transmit VCO's (U1 and U5) provide high-frequency modulation. Signals for both modulation ports are provided from DACs on the digital board.

Power Amplifier

The power amplifier (U3) is a Mitsubishi RA07M4047M-01 module for the low band version and a Mitsubishi RA07M4452M-01 module for the high band version. The PA module provides the desired RF power output level and is stable over a wide range of VSWR conditions. The PA is driven by a SGA-6589 driver (U20) that typically provides +21 dBm output power. The PA is turned on and off by switching the power to this driver via transistor D10.

ALC

mitter on/off splatter filtering is provided by an RC network (R76, R109, C267 and C141.)

T/R Switching and Harmonic Filter

The output of the power amplifier is applied to the transmit/receive RF PIN switch (D12 & D13.) This is a high dynamic-range switch that is capable of passing the desired transmit power with minimal compression. Any harmonics generated by the PA module and the RF T/R switch are filtered by a harmonic filter that is between the RF T/R switch and the antenna jack.

5.3 VERSION A/B RF BOARD OVERVIEW

NOTE: The following describes the earlier A and B RF boards (see Section 1.12.1). The RF board is not field serviceable and must be replaced as a un it with a new board.

To maintain the specified Transmitter output power level, Automatic Level Control (ALC) is provided to control the drive level to the PA. The detected forward power is compared to a reference level provided by the digital board via op amp U21A. The resulting error voltage is applied to a power level control port of the power amplifier module. Trans-

The receiver front end consists of a preselector, an RF amplifier, a second preselector, and a mixer (see Figure 5-2). Both preselectors on the VHF and UHF boards are varactor-tuned, two-pole filters controlled by the control logic. The 800 MHz board uses striplin e technology for the preselector. The RF amplifier is a dual-gate, gallium-arsenide based IC. The mixer is a

5-5

Page 49

VHF/UHF RF BOARD (VERSION A/B)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

double-balanced, active mixer coupled by transformers. Injection is provided by the VCO through an injection filter. Refer to Table 5-1 for local oscillator (LO) and first IF information.

The frequency generation function is performed by three ICs and associated circuitry. The reference oscillator provides a frequency standard to the synthesizer/prescaler IC which controls the VCO IC. The VCO IC actually generates the first LO and transmitinjection signals and buffers them to the required power level. The synthesizer/prescaler circuit module incorporates frequency-division and comparison circuitry to keep the VCO signals stable. The synthesizer/prescaler IC is controlled by the control logic through a serial bus. Most of the synthesizer circuitry is enclosed in rigid metal cavities to reduce microphonic effects.

Table 5-1 LO and First IF Frequencies

VHF UHF 800 MHz

LO Frequency range

First IF Frequency

181.15 -

219.15 MHz

45.15 MHz 73.35 MHz 73.35 MHz

329.65 -

446.65 MHz

776.65 -

796.65 MHz

The receiver back end consists of a two-pole crystal filter, an IF amplifier , a second two-pole crystal filter, and the digital back-end IC (ABACUS). The two-pole filters are wide enough to accommodate 5 kHz modulation. Final IF filtering is done digitally in the ADSIC.

The digital back-end IC (ABACUS) consists of an amplifier, the second mixer, an IF analog-to-digital converter, a baseband down-converter, and a 2.4 MHz synthesis circuit. The second LO is generated by discrete components external to the IC. The output of the ABACUS IC is a digital bit stream that is current driven on a differential pair for a reduction in noise generation.

The transmitter consists of an RF power amplifier IC that gets an injection signal from the VCO. Transmit power is controlled by two custom ICs that monitor the output of a directional coupler and adjust PA control voltages correspondingly. The signal passes through a Rx/Tx switch that uses PIN diodes to automatically provide an appropriate interface to transmit or receive signals.

5.4 VHF/UHF RF BOARD (VERSION A/B)

NOTE: The following describes the earlier Version A and B RF boards described in Section 1.12.1. The RF board is not field serviceable and must be replaced as a unit if it is defective.

5.4.1 FREQUENCY GENERATION UNIT (FGU)

The frequency generation unit (FGU) consists of three major sections: the high stability reference oscillator (U203), the fractional-N synthesizer (U204,) and the VCO buffer (U201). A 5V regulator (U202), supplies power to the FGU. The synthesizer receives the 5V REG at U204, and applies it to a filtering circuit within the module and capacitor C253. The well-filtered 5-volt output at U204, pin 19 is distributed to the Tx and Rx VCOs and the VCO buffer IC.

The mixer’s LO injection signal and transmit frequency are generated by the Rx VCO and Tx VCO, respectively. The Rx VCO uses an external active device (Q202), whereas the VHF Tx VCO’s active device is a transistor inside the VCO buffer. The UHF Tx VCO uses two active devices, one external (Q203) and the other internal to the VCO buffer. The base and emitter connections of this internal transistor are pins 11 and 12 of U201.

The Rx VCO is a Colpitts-type oscillator, with capacitors C235 and C236 providing feedback. The Rx VCO transistor (Q202) is turned on when pin 38 of U204 switches from high to low. The Rx VCO signal is received by the VCO buffer at U201, pin 9, where it is amplified by a buffer inside the IC. The amplified signal at pin 2 is routed through a low-pass filter (L201 and associated capacitors) and injected as the first LO signal into the mixer (U2, pin 8). In the VCO buffer, the Rx VCO signal (or the Tx VCO signal during transmit) is also routed to an internal prescaler buffer. The buffered output at U201, pin 16 is applied to a low-pass filter (L205 and associated capacitors). After filtering, the signal is routed to a prescaler divider in the synthesizer at U204, pin 21.

The divide ratios for the prescaler circuits are determined from information stored in memory during programming. The microcontroller extracts data for the division ratio as determined by the selected channel and sends that information to a comparator in the synthesizer via a bus. A 16.8 MHz reference oscil-

5-6

Page 50

VHF/UHF RF BOARD (VERSION A/B)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

lator, U203, applies the 16.8 MHz signal to the synthesizer at U204 pin 14. The oscillator signal is divided into one of three pre-determined frequencies. A timebased algorithm is used to generate the fractional-N ratio.

If the two frequencies in the synthesizer’s comparator differ, a control (error) voltage is produced. The phase detector error voltage (V control) at pins 31 and 33 of U204 is applied to the loop filter consisting of resistors R211, R212, and R213, and capacitors C244, C246, C247, and C248. The filtered voltage alters the VCO frequency until the correct frequency is synthesized. The phase detector gain is set by components connected to U204, pins 28 and 29.

In the Tx mode, U204, pin 38 goes high and U201, pin 14 goes low, which turns of f transistor Q202 and turns on the internal Tx VCO transistor in U204 and the external Tx VCO buffer Q203 on the UHF circuit. The Tx VCO feedback capacitors are C219 and C220. Varactor diode CR203/CR207 sets the Tx frequency while varactor CR202 is the Tx modulation varactor.

The modulation of the carrier is achieved by using a two-port modulation technique. The modulation of low frequency tones is achieved by injecting the tones into the A/D section of the fractional-N synthesizer. The digitized signal is modulated by the fractional-N divider, generating the required deviation. Modulation of the high-frequency audio signals is achieved by modulating the varactor (CR203) through a frequency compensation network. Resistors R207 and R208 form a potential divider for the higherfrequency audio signals.

In order to cover the very wide bandwidths, positive and negative V-control voltages are used. High control voltages are achieved using positive and negative multipliers. The positive voltage multiplier circuit consists of components CR204, C256, C257, and reservoir capacitor C258. The negative multiplier circuit consists of components CR205, CR206, C266, C267, and reservoir capacitor C254.

Out-of-phase clocks for the positive multiplier appear at U204, pins 9 and 10. Out-of-phase clocks for the negative multiplier appear at U204, pins 7 and 8, and only when the negative V-control is required (that is, when the VCO frequency exceeds the crossover

frequency). When the negative V-control is not required, transistor Q201 is turned on, and capacitor C259 discharges. The 13V supply generated by the positive multiplier is used to power-up the phase detector circuitry. The negative V-control is applied to the anodes of the VCO varactors.

The Tx VCO signal is amplified by an internal buffer in U201, routed through a low pass filter and routed to the Tx PA module, U105, pin 1. The Tx and Rx VCOs and buffers are activated via a control signal from U204, pin 38.

The reference oscillator supplies a 16.8 MHz clock to the synthesizer where it is divided down to a

2.1 MHz clock. This divided-down clock is fed to the ABACUS IC (U401), where it is further processed for internal use.

5.4.2 ANTENNA SWITCH

The antenna switch is a current device consisting of a pair of diodes (CR108/ CR109) that electronically steer RF between the receiver and the transmitter . In the transmit mode, RF is routed through transmit switching diode CR108, and sent to the antenna. In the receive mode, RF is received from the antenna, routed through receive switching diode CR109, and applied to the RF amplifier Q1 (VHF) or U1 (UHF). In transmit, bias current, sourced from U101, pin 21, is routed through L105, U104, CR108, and L122 (VHF) and L105, CR108, and L122 (UHF). Sinking of the bias current is through the transmit ALC module, U101, pin 19. In the receive mode, bias current, sourced from switched B+, is routed through Q107 (pin 3 to pin 2), L123 (UHF), L121, CR109, and L122. Sinking of the bias current is through the 5-volt regulator, U106, pin 8.

5.4.3 RECEIVER FRONT END

The RF signal is received by the antenna and coupled through the external RF switch. The UHF board applies the RF signal to a low-pass filter consisting of L126, L127, L128, C149, C150, and C151. The VHF board bypasses the low-pass filter. The filtered RF signal is passed through the antenna switch (CR109) and applied to a bandpass filter consisting of (VHF) L11 - L14, CR1 - CR9, C4, C2, and C3 or (UHF) L30, L31, L32, L34, L35, CR6 CR9, C1, C2, and C3. The bandpass filter is tuned by

5-7

Page 51

VHF/UHF RF BOARD (VERSION A/B)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

applying a control voltage to the varactor diodes in the filter (CR1 - CR9 VHF and CR6 - CR9 UHF).

The bandpass filter is electronically tuned by the D/A IC (U102), which is controlled by the microcomputer.The D/A output range is extended through the use of a current mirror consisting of Q108 and R115 and R116. When Q108 is turned on via R115, the D/A output is reduced due to the voltage drop across R11 6. Depending on the carrier frequency, the microcomputer will turn Q108 on or off. Wideband operation of the filter is achieved by retuning the bandpass filter across the band.

The output of the bandpass filter is applied to wideband GaAs RF amplifier IC U1 (UHF) or active device Q1 (VHF). The RF signal is then further filtered by a second broadband, fixed-tuned, bandpass filter consisting of C6, C7, C8, C80, C86, C87, C88, C97, C99, L3, L4, L5, and L30 (VHF) or C4 -C7, C88 - C94, C99, and L11 - L15 (UHF) to improve the spurious rejection.

The filtered RF signal is routed through a broadband 50-ohm transformer (T1) to the input of a broadband mixer/buffer (U2). Mixer U2 uses GaAs FETs in a double-balanced, Gilbert Cell configuration.

The RF signal is applied to the mixer at U2 pins 1 and 15. An injection signal (1st LO) of about –10 dBm supplied by the FGU is applied to U2, pin 8. Mixing of the RF and the 1st LO results in an output signal that is the first IF frequency. The first IF frequency is 45.15 MHz for the VHF band and 73.35 for the UHF band. High side injection is used for VHF and low side for UHF. The first IF signal output at U2, pins 4 and 6 is routed through transformer T2 and impedance matching components, and applied to a two-pole crystal filter (FL1), which is the final stage of the receiver front end. The two-pole crystal filter removes unwanted mixer products. Impedance matching between the output of the transformer (T2) and the input of the filter (FL1) is accomplished by C605 and L605 (VHF) or C611, C614, and L605 (UHF).

Transistor Q601 is biased by the 5V regulator (U202). The IF frequency on the collector of Q601 is applied to a second crystal filter through a matching circuit. The second crystal filter (FL2) input is matched by C604, C603, and L601 (VHF) and C604, L601, and L602 (UHF). The filter supplies further attenuation at the IF sidebands to increase the radios selectivity. The output of FL2 routed to pin 32 of U401 through a matching circuit which consists of L603, L606, and C608 (VHF) and L603, C606, and C605 (UHF).

In the ABACUS IC (U401), the first IF frequency is amplified and then down-converted to the second IF frequency of 450 kHz. At this point, the analog signal is converted into two digital bit streams by a sigmadelta A/D converter. The bit streams are then digitally filtered, mixed down to baseband, and filtered again. The differential output data stream is then sent to the logic board where it is decoded to produce the recovered audio.

The ABACUS IC (U401) is electronically programmable. The amount of filtering, which is dependent on the radio channel spacing and signal type, is controlled by the microcontroller. Additional filtering, which used to be provided externally by a conventional ceramic filter, is replaced by internal digital filters in the ABACUS IC. The ABACUS IC contains a feedback AGC circuit to expand the dynamic range of the sigma-delta converter. The differential output data contains the quadrature (I and Q) information in 16-bit words, the AGC information in a 9-bit word, imbedded word sync information, and fill bits dependent on sampling speed. A fractional N synthesizer is also incorporated on the ABACUS IC for 2nd LO generation.

The 2nd LO/VCO is a Colpitts oscillator built around transistor Q401 (VHF) or Q1 (UHF). The VCO has a varactor diode, VR401 (VHF) or CR5 (UHF) to adjust the VCO frequency. The control signal for the varactor is derived from a loop filter consisting of C426, C428, and R413.

5.4.5 TRANSMITTER

5.4.4 RECEIVER BACK END

The output of crystal filter FL1 is matched to the input of IF buffer amplifier transistor Q601 by C610 and L604 (VHF) and C609, C610, and L600 (UHF).

The transmitter consists of three major sections:

• Harmonic Filter

• RF Power Amplifier Module

• ALC Circuits

5-8

Page 52

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

800 MHz RF BOARD (VERSION A/B)VHF/UHF RF BOARD (VERSION A/B)

Harmonic Filter

With VHF versions, RF from PA module U105 is routed through coupler U104 and passed through the harmonic filtering network to antenna switch CR108. With UHF versions, RF from the PA module U105 is routed through coupler U104 and passed through transmit antenna switch CR108 and applied to a harmonic filtering network. The harmonic filtering circuit is composed of (VHF) L126, L127, L128, C149, C150, and C151 or (UHF) L126, L127, L128, C129, C130, C149, C150, and C151. Resistor R117 (VHF) or R117 (UHF) provides a current-limited 5V to J2.

RF Power Amplifier Module

RF power amplifier module U105 is a wide-band, three-stage (VHF) or four-stage (UHF) amplifier. Nominal input and output impedance of U105 is 50 ohms. The DC bias for U105 is on pins 2, 4, 5. In the transmit mode, the voltage on U105, pins 2 and 4 (close to the B+ level) is obtained via switching transistor Q101. Transistor Q101 receives its control base signal as follows:

• The mi crocomputer keys the D/A IC to produce a

ready signal at U 102 pin 3,

The transmit ALC circuit, built around U101, is the heart of the power control loop. Circuits in the Tx ALC module compare the signals at U101, pins 2 and 7. The resultant signal, C BIAS, at U101, pin 4 is applied to the base of transistor Q110. In response to the base drive, transistor Q110 varies the DC control voltages applied to the RF PA at U105, pin 3, thus controlling the RF power of module (U105).

Thermistor RT101 senses the temperature of the Tx ALC IC. If an abnormal operating condition exists that causes the PA temperature to rise to an unacceptable level, the thermistor forces the ALC to reduce the set power.

5.5 800 MHz RF BOARD (VERSION A/B)

NOTE: The following describes the earlier Version A and B RF boards described in Section 1.12.1. The RF Board is not field serviceable and must be replaced as a unit if it is defective.

5.5.1 FREQUENCY SYNTHESIS

The complete synthesizer subsystem consists of the reference oscillator (U304), the voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO U307), a buffer IC (U303), and the synthesizer (U302).

• the ready signal at U102 pin 3 is applied to the Tx

ALC IC at U101 pin 14 (5V), and

• the synthesizer sends a LOC signal to the Tx ALC

IC (U204 pin 40 to U101 pin 16).

When the LOC signal and the ready signal are both received, the Tx ALC IC (pin 13) sends a control signal to turn on transistor Q101.

ALC Circuits

Coupler module U104 samples the forward and reverse power of the PA output voltage. Reverse power is present when there is other than 50 ohms impedance at the antenna port. Sampling is achieved by coupling some of the forward and/or reverse power, and applying it to CR102 (VHF) or CR101 (UHF) and CR103 for rectification and summing. The resultant DC signal is then applied to the Tx ALC IC (U101, pin

2) as RFDET to be used as an RF strength indicator.

The reference oscillator contains a temperaturecompensated 16.8 MHz crystal. This oscillator is digitally tuned and contains a temperature-referenced, five-bit, analog-to-digital (A/D) converter. The output of the oscillator (pin 10 on U304) is applied to pin 14 (XTAL1) on U302 through capacitor C309 and resistor R306.

Voltage-controlled oscillator module U307 is varactor tuned. Therefore, as the voltage being applied to pins 1 and 7 of the VCO varies (2-11V), so does the varactor's capacitance which changes the VCO output frequency. The 800 MHz VCO is a dual-range oscillator that covers the 806-825 MHz and the 851-870 MHz frequency bands.

The low-band VCO (777-825 MHz) provides the first LO injection frequencies (777-797 MHz) that are

73.35 MHz below the carrier frequency . In addition, in the transmit mode when the radio is operated through a repeater, the low-band VCO generates the transmit

5-9

Page 53

800 MHz RF BOARD (VERSION A/B)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

frequencies (806-825 MHz) that are 45 MHz below the receiver frequencies. The low band VCO is selected by pulling pin 3 high and pin 8 low on U307. When radio-to-radio or talk-around operation is necessary, the high band VCO (851-870 MHz) is selected. This is accomplished by pulling pin 3 low and pin 8 high on U307.

The buffer IC (U303) includes a Tx, Rx, and prescaler buffer which maintain a constant output level and provides isolation. The Tx buffer is selected by setting pin 7 of U303 high, and the Rx buffer is selected by setting pin 7 of U303 low. The prescaler buffer is always on. In order to select the proper combination of VCO and buffer, the following conditions must be true at pin 6 of U303 (or pin 38 of U3 02) and pin 7 of U303 (or pin 39 of U302):

• For first LO injection frequencies 777-797 MHz,

pins 6 and 7 must both be low.

• For Tx repeater frequencies 806-825 MHz, pins 6

and 7 must both be high.

the RF signal is present at pin 4 of U303; in the RX mode, the RF signal is present at pin 3 of U303.

• The output of the prescaler buffer, pin 15 of U303,

is applied to the PREIN port (pin 21) of U302. The prescaler in U302 is a dual modulus type with selectable divider ratios. This divider ratio is controlled by the loop divider, which in turn receives its inputs from the SRL. The loop divider adds or subtracts phase to the prescaler divider by changing the divide ratio via the modulus control line.

• The output of the prescaler is then applied to the

loop divider.

• The output of the loop divider is then applied to the

phase detector. The phase detector compares the loop divider's output signal with the signal from U304 (that is divided down after it is applied to pin 14 of U302). The result of the signal comparison is a pulsed DC signal which is applied to the charge pump.

• For talk-around Tx frequencies 851-870 MHz, pin 6

must be low and pin 7 must be high.

The synthesizer IC (U302) consists of a prescaler, a programmable loop divider , a di vider control logic, a phase detector, a charge pump, an A/D converter for low-frequency digital modulation, a balance attenuator to balance the high-frequency analog modulation to the low-frequency digital modulation, a 13V positivevoltage multiplier, a serial interface for control, and finally, a filter for the regulated 5-volt supply. This filtered five volts is present at pin 19 of U302, pin 9 of U307, and pins 2, 3, 4, and 15 of U303. It is also applied directly to resistors R309, R315, and R311. Additionally , the 13V supply generated by the positive voltage multiplier circuitry should be present at pin 35 of U302. The serial interface (SRL) is connected to the microprocessor via the data line (pin 2 of U302), clock line (pin 3 of U302), and chip-enable line (pin 4 of U302).

The complete synthesizer subsystem operates as follows:

• The output of the VCO, pin 4 on U307, is fed into

the RF input port (pin 9) of U303. In the Tx mode,

• The charge pump outputs a current that is pres ent at

pin 32 of U302. The loop filter (which consists of capacitors C322, C317, C318, C329, C324, and C315, and resistors R307, R305, and R314) transforms this current into a voltage that is applied to pins 1 and 7 of U307 to alter the VCO's output frequency.

In order to modulate the PLL, the two-port modulation method is utilized. The analog modulating signal is applied to the A/D converter as well as the balance attenuator, via U302, pin 5. The A/D converter converts the low-frequency analog modulating signal into a digital code that is applied to the loop divider, thereby causing the carrier to deviate. The balance attenuator is used to adjust the VCO's deviation sensitivity to high-frequency modulating signals.

5.5.2 ANTENNA SWITCH

An electronic PIN diode switch steers RF between the receiver and transmitter. The common node of the switch is at capacitor C101. In the transmit mode, RF is routed to the anode of diode CR104. In receive mode, RF is routed to pin 1 of U201. In the transmit mode, bias current sourced from U504, pin

5-10

Page 54

800 MHz RF BOARD (VERSION A/B)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

21, is routed through PIN diodes CR104 and CR102 which biases them to a low-impedance state. Bias current returns to ground through U504, pin 20. In receive, U504, pin 21, is pulled down to ground and pin 20 is pulled up to B+ which reverse-biases diodes CR104 and CR102 to a high impedance.

5.5.3 RECEIVER FRONT END

The 800 MHz receiver front end converts the received RF signal to the first IF frequency of 73.35 MHz and also provides spurious immunity and adjacent channel selectivity. The received RF signal is passed through antenna switch input matching components C101, L105, and C114, through tank components C106 and L103 (which are anti-resonant at the radios transmitter frequencies), and through output matching components C103 and L104. Both pin diodes CR102 and CR104 must be back-biased to properly route the received signal.

The stage following the antenna switch is a 50ohm, inter-digitated, three-pole, stripline preselector (U201). The preselector is positioned after the antenna switch to provide the receiver preamp with some protection against strong, out-of-band signals.

After the preselector (U201), the received signal is processed through receiver preamp U202. The preamp is a dual-gate, GaAs MESFET transistor which has been internally biased for optimum IM, NF, and gain performance. Components L201 and L202 match the input (gate 1) of the amp to the first preselector, while at the same time connecting gate 1 to ground potential. The output (drain) of the amp is pin 7, and is matched to the subsequent receiver stage by L204 and C222.

A supply voltage of 5V DC is provided to pin 3 through RF choke L203 and bypass capacitor C204. The 5-volt supply is also present at pin 4, which connects to a voltage divider network that biases gate 2 (pin 5) to a predefined quiescent voltage of 1.2V DC. Resistor R202 and capacitor C203 are connected to pin 5 to provide amp stability. The FET source (pin

3) is internally biased at 0.55 to 0.7VDC for proper operation with bypass capacitors C201 and C202, connected to the same node.

The output of the amp is matched to a second three-pole preselector (U203) of the type previously

discussed. The next stage in the receiver chain is first mixer U205 which uses low-side injection to convert the RF carrier to an intermediate frequency (IF) of

73.35 MHz.

Since low-side injection is used, the LO frequency is offset below the RF carrier by 73.35 MHz, or fLO = fRF - 73.35 MHz. The mixer utilizes GaAs FETs in a double-balanced, Gilbert Cell configuration. The LO port (pin 8) incorporates an internal buffer and a phase shift network to eliminate the need for a LO transformer. The LO buf fer bypass capacitors (C208, C221, and C216) are connected to pin 10 of U205, and should exhibit a nominal DC voltage of 1.2 to 1.4V DC. Pin 11 of U205 is LO buffer Vdd (5V DC), with associated bypass capacitors C226 and C209 connected to the same node. An internal voltage divider network within the LO buffer is bypassed to virtual ground at pin 12 of U205 through bypass capacitor C213. The mixer's LO port is matched to the radio's PLL by a capacitive tap, C207 and C206.

A balun transformer (T202) is used to couple the RF signal into the mixer. The primary winding of T202 is matched to the preceding stage by capacitor C223, with C227 providing a DC block to ground. The secondary winding of T202 provides a differential output, with a 180° phase differential being achieved by setting the secondary center tap to virtual ground using bypass capacitors C210, C211, and C212. The secondary of transformer T202 is connected to pins 1 and 15 of the mixer IC, which drives the source leg of dual FETs used to toggle the paralleled differential amplifier configuration within the Gilbert Cell.

The final stage in the receiver front end is a twopole crystal filter (FL1). The crystal filter provides some of the receiver's adjacent channel selectivity. The input to the crystal filter is matched to the first mixer using L605, C600, and C614. The output of the crystal filter is matched to the input of IF buffer amplifier transistor Q601 by L600, C609, and C610.

5.5.4 RECEIVER BACK END

The IF frequency on the collector of Q601 is applied to a second crystal filter (FL2) through a matching circuit consisting of L601, L602, C604, and C612. The filter supplies further attenuation at the IF sidebands to increase the radio's selectivity. The output of FL2 is routed to pin 32 of U401 through a matching

5-11

Page 55

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

800 MHz RF BOARD (VERSION A/B) VHF 50W PA BOARD

circuit consisting of L603, C603, and C606, and DC blocking capacitor C613.

In the ABACUS IC (U401), the first IF frequency is amplified and then down-converted to the secon d IF of 450 kHz. The analog signal is then converted into two digital bit streams by a sigma-delta A/D converter. The bit streams are then digitally filtered, mixed down to baseband, and filtered again. The differential output data stream is then sent to the ADSIC on the logic board, where it is decoded to produce the recovered audio.

The ABACUS IC (U401) is electronically programmable. The amount of filtering is dependent on the radio channel spacing and signal type, and is controlled by the microcomputer. Additional filtering, which used to be provided externally by a conventional ceramic filter, is replaced by internal digital filters in the ABACUS IC. The ABACUS IC contains a feedback AGC circuit to expand the dynamic range of the sigma-delta converter. The diffe rential output data contains the quadrature (I and Q) information in 16-bit words, the AGC information in a 9-bit word, imbedded word sync information, and fill bits which are dependent on sampling speed. A fractional N synthesizer is also incorporated on the ABACUS IC for 2nd LO generation.

The second LO/VCO is a Colpitts oscillator built around transistor Ql. The VCO has a varactor diode (VR401), which is used to adjust the VCO frequency. The control signal for the varactor is derived from a loop filter consisting of C426, C428, and R413.

5.5.5 TRANSMITTER

The 800 MHz RF power amplifier (PA) is a fivestage amplifier (U502). The RF power amplifier has a nominal input and output impedance of 50 ohms.

An RF input drive level of approximately +3 dBm, supplied from the VCO buffer IC (U303), is applied to pin 1 of U502. The DC bias for the internal stages of U502 is applied to pins 3 and 4 of the module. Pin 3 is switched through Q502 and pin 4 is unswitched B+ to the final amplifier stage. Power control is achieved by varying of the DC bias to pin 2, the third and fourth amplifier stages of the module. The amplified RF signal leaves the P A module at pin 5 and is applied to the directional coupler (U501).

The purpose of U501 is to sample both the forward power and the reverse power. Reverse power is present when a load other than 50 ohms exists at the antenna port. The sampling is achieved by coupling some of the reflected power, forward and/or reverse, to a coupled leg on the coupler. The sampled RF signals are applied to diode CR501 for rectification and summing. The resultant DC signal is applied to the ALC IC (U504, pin 2) as RFDET, to be used as an indicator of the strength of the RF signal being passed through the directional coupler (U501).

The transmit ALC IC (U504) is the main part of the power control loop. The REF V line (U504 pin 7), a DC signal supplied from the D/A IC (U503), and the RF DET signal described earlier, are compared internally in the ALC IC to determine the amount of C BIAS, pin 4, to be applied to the base of transistor Q501. Transistor Q501 responds to the base drive level by varying the DC control voltages applied to pin 2 of the RF PA which controls the RIF power level of module U502. The ALC IC also controls the base switching to transistor Q502 via pin 12, BIAS.

The D/A IC (U503) controls the DC switching of the transceiver board. Its outputs, SC1 and SC3 (pins 12 and 14, respectively), control transistor Q503 which then supplies Tx 5V and Rx 5V to the transceiver board. The D/A also supplies DC bias to the detector diode (CR501) via pin 7, and the REF V signal to the ALC IC (U504).

5.6 VHF 50W PA BOARD

5.6.1 ANTENNA SWITCHES

The RF signal from the RF board is fed by a coaxial cable to the PA board. Since both the receive and transmit signals are present on the input of the PA board, special antenna switching is required on the PA board to route the receive signal around the amplifier section to the antenna. Both a high power and a low power antenna switch are used as shown in Figure 5-3.

The low power switch consists of pin diodes* CR512 and CR513 and other components. The Q7 output of shift register U501 is high in the transmit mode and low in the receive mode. Therefore, in the transmit mode, Q507 and Q514 are on and Q508 and Q513 are off. This forward biases CR513 and reverse biases CR512. The transmit signal from the RF board

* A reverse biased pin diode presents a high impedance to RF signals.

Conversely, and a forward biased pin diode presents a variable low impedance that changes inversely to current.

5-12

Page 56

From Logic Bd

Shift Register

U501

VHF 50W PA BOARD (CONT’D)

Power Adjust

Power

Control

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Current Sense

Driver

Q510

RF Board

Low Power

Antenna Sw

Q509

Figure 5-3 VHF 50W PA Board Block Diagram

then has a low impedance path through C533 and CR513 to driver Q509, and the high impedance provided by CR512 blocks it from the receive path.

In the receive mode, the opposite occurs, so CR513 is reverse biased and CR512 forward biased. The receive signal from the high power antenna switch (see following) then has a low impedance path through C544, CR512, and C534 to the RF board, and is blocked from the power amplifier by CR513.

The high power antenna switch consists of pin diodes* CR501, CR502, and CR503. This switch effectively switches the antenna between the power amplifier and the receive bypass path to the RF board (see preceding illustration).

Antenna

Final Amp

Power Sense

High Power Antenna Sw

Low-Pass

Filter

biasing is provided by L510 and ferrite bead EP503, and negative feedback for stabilization is provided by R557 and R543. Supply voltage to Q509 is controlled by the power control circuit to regulate the power output of the transmitter. Conditioning and isolation of the DC supply to Q509 is provided by L509, L514, EP501, and C540-C542.

Impedance matching between Q509 and final amplifier Q510 is provided by several capacitors and sections of microstrip. Class C biasing of Q510 is provided by L515, EP502, R559, and R560. The current for this stage flows through L516, R561, and L517. The voltage drop across R561 is sensed by the power control circuit to detect an over-current condition.

Transistor Q501 is on in the transmit mode and off in the receive mode. Therefore, in the transmit mode, all three diodes are forward biased (CR501 and CR502 are biased by voltage applied from the collector of Q510). The transmit signal then has a low impedance path through CR502 to the low-pass filter and is blocked from the bypass path by L504/C511 and L505/C515 which present a high impedance at the transmit frequency. In the receive mode, all three diodes are reverse biased. Therefore, the receive signal from the antenna is blocked from the power amplifier by CR502 and has a low impedance path through L504 and L505 to the RF board.

5.6.2 AMPLIFIERS (Q509, Q510)

Impedance matching between the low power antenna switch and Q509 is provided by L511 and several capacitors and sections of microstrip. Class C

* A reverse biased pin diode presents a high impedance to RF signals.

Conversely, and a forward biased pin diode presents a variable low impedance that changes inversely to current.

From Q510 the transmit signal is fed through another impedance matching network to a directional coupler, to the high power antenna switch (see preceding section), and then to the low-pass filter . This filter attenuates harmonics occurring above the transmit frequency band to prevent adjacent channel interference. The directional coupler detects the forward component of the output power for use by the power control circuit.

5.6.3 POWER CONTROL

Introduction

The power control circuit maintains a constant power output as changes occur in temperature and voltage. It does this by sensing forward power and then varying the drive to Q510 to maintain a constant output power. The drive to Q510 is controlled by

5-13

Page 57

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

VHF 50W PA BOARD (CONT’D) VHF 100W PA BOARD

varying the supply voltage to driver Q509. The current to final amplifier Q510 is also sensed, but power output is affected by this input only if current becomes excessive. Power output is then cut back to approximately 25% of full power.

The power output level is set in 127 steps by D/A converter U501 which is controlled by the microcontroller. This allows power to be adjusted using the PCTune software and computer and also different power levels to be programmed. In addition, it allows the microcontroller to cut back power if the power amplifier temperature is excessive. Temperature is sensed via thermistor RT501.

U502A, Q500/Q502 Operation

The forward power signal from the directional coupler is applied to pin 2 of amplifier U502A. This is a DC signal that increases proportionally to forward power. The other input to U502A is a DC reference voltage from a D/A converter formed by shift register U501 and several resistors. The voltage from this D/A converter sets the voltage on pin 3 which sets the power output of the transmitter.

U502A is a difference amplifier which amplifies the difference between the reference voltage on pin 3 and the forward power signal on pin 2. The turn-on time of U502A is controlled by the time constant of C528 and R534, and negative AC feedback to prevent oscillation is also provided by C528. This circuit operates as follows: Assume the output power attempts to increase. The DC voltage applied to U502A, pin 2 then increases which causes the output voltage on pin 1 to decrease. Transistors Q505 and Q506 then turn off slightly which decreases the supply voltage to driver Q509. The output power then decreases to maintain a constant power output. R541 and R542 limit the voltage gain of Q505 and Q506 to approximately two.

Delayed PTT

the 7.2-volt supply applied through R537 and CR506. This causes the output on pin 1 of U502A to go low which shuts off power to Q509. Then when the transmitter is keyed, the Q504 control signal goes high after a short delay. Q504 then turns on and diode CR506 is reverse biased. Only the forward power signal is then applied to pin 2 of U502A.

Over-Current Shutdown

Current to final amplifier Q510 is monitored by sensing the voltage drop across R561. Pins 3 and 6 of U506 are connected across this resistor. As current increases, the output voltage on U506, pin 8 decreases. This causes the output voltage of voltage follower U507A to decrease. This signal is applied to Schmitt trigger U502B. When the voltage on pin 6 rises above the reference on pin 5, the output on pin 7 goes low. This lowers the power control voltage applied to U502A, pin 3 which lowers the power output to approximately 25% of full power.

5.7 VHF 100W PA BOARD

With 100-watt models, an additional 100-watt PA board is mounted in an extended heat sink assembly. The two power amplifier stages on this board are effectively connected into the 50-watt PA board circuitry between final amplifier Q510 and the power detector circuit. Therefore, the power detector and low-pass on the 50-watt PA board continue to be utilized with 100-watt models.

Jumpers R511 and R512 are removed on the 50watt PA board and the RF signal is coupled by C660 to the 100-watt PA board. A 90° hybrid coupler (U1) on the 100-watt board splits the signal into two approximately 25-watt signals that are fed to final amplifiers Q1 and Q2. R5 dissipates power reflected back into the device. A section of microstrip and several other components on the input of these devices provide impedance matching. Likewise, impedance matching on the output is provided by a section of microstrip and several other components.

In the Q1 collector circuit, L4, L5, ferrite bead EP2, and several capacitors provide biasing and also decoupling of various unwanted RF signals from the DC supply . Similar components in the collector ci rcuit of Q2 provide a similar function. The signal from Q1

5-14

Page 58

Shift Register

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

UHF 15W PA BOARD

Pre-Driver

Power Adjust

Current Sense

Driver

Q508

RF Board

From Logic Bd

Low Power

Antenna Sw

U501

Q509

Figure 5-4 UHF 15W PA Board Block Diagram

and Q2 is combined by another hybrid coupler (U2) resulting in a 100W+ output signal. This signal is fed back to the 50-watt PA board and applied to the input of the power detect and antenna switch circuit.

5.8 UHF 15W PA BOARD

5.8.1 ANTENNA SWITCHES

Power

Control

Q507

Final Amp

Power Sense

High Power

Antenna Sw

Low-Pass

C519, C555, CR507, and C569 to the RF board, and is blocked from the power amplifier by CR508.

The high power antenna switch consists of pin diodes* CR501, CR505, and CR503. This switch effectively switches the antenna between the power amplifier and the receive bypass path to the RF board (see preceding illustration).

Antenna

Filter

The low power switch consists of pin diodes* CR507 and CR508 and other components. The Q7 output of shift register U501 is high in the transmit mode and low in the receive mode. Therefore, in the transmit mode, Q504 and Q510 are on and Q505 and Q506 are off. This forward biases CR508 and reverse biases CR507. The transmit signal from the RF board then has a low impedance path through C574 and CR508 to driver Q509, and the high impedance provided by CR507 blocks it from the receive path.

In the receive mode, the opposite occurs, so CR508 is reverse biased and CR507 is forward biased. The receive signal from the high power antenna switch (see following) then has a low impedance path through

Transistor Q503 is on in the transmit mode and off in the receive mode. Therefore, in the transmit mode, all three diodes are forward biased (CR501 and CR505 are biased by voltage applied from the collector of Q507). The transmit signal then has a low impedance path through CR505 to the low-pass filter and is blocked from the bypass path by L501/C528 and L500/C523 which present a high impedance at the transmit frequency. In the receive mode, all three diodes are reverse biased. Therefore, the receive signal from the antenna is blocked from the power amplifier by CR505 and has a low impedance path through L501 and L500 to the RF board.

5.8.2 AMPLIFIERS (Q509, Q508)

Impedance matching between the low power antenna switch and Q509 is provided by 3 dB pad R568/R562/R569 and several capacitors and two sections of microstrip. Class C biasing is provided by L510, ferrite bead EP6, and R556. Supply voltage to Q509 is controlled by the power control circuit to regulate the power output of the transmitter. Condi-

* A reverse biased pin diode presents a high impedance to RF signals.

Conversely, and a forward biased pin diode presents a variable low impedance that changes inversely to current.

5-15

Page 59

UHF 15W PA BOARD (Cont’d)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

tioning and isolation of the DC supply to Q509 is provided by L508, L510, EP1, and several capacitors.

Impedance matching between Q509 and driver Q508 is provided by two sections of microstrip and several capacitors. Class C biasing of Q508 is provided by L513, EP4, and R563. The supp ly voltage to this stage is the unswitched battery supply.

Impedance matching and biasing on the input of final amplifier Q507 is similar to Q508. The current for this stage flows through L511, R554, and L505. The voltage drop across R554 is sensed by the power control circuit to detect an over-current condition.

From Q507 the transmit signal is fed through another impedance matching network to a directional coupler, to the high power antenna switch (see preceding section), and then to the low-pass filter. T his filter attenuates harmonics occurring above the transmit frequency band to prevent adjacent channel interference. The directional coupler detects the forward component of the output power for use by the power control circuit.

U502A, Q500/Q502 Operation

U502A is a difference amplifier which amplifies the difference between the reference voltage on pin 3 and the forward power signal on pin 2. The turn-on time of U502A is controlled by the time constant of C504 and R514, and negative AC feedback to prevent oscillation is also provided by C504. This circuit operates as follows: Assume the output power attempts to increase. The DC voltage applied to U502A, pin 2 then increases which causes the output voltage on pin 1 to decrease. Transistors Q501 and Q500 then turn off slightly which decreases the supply voltage to predriver Q509. The output power then decreases to maintain a constant power output. R516 and R521 limit the voltage gain of Q501 and Q500 to approximately two.

5.8.3 POWER CONTROL

Introduction

The power control circuit maintains a constant power output as changes occur in temperature and voltage. It does this by sensing forward power and then varying the drive to Q508 to maintain a constant output power. The drive to Q508 is controlled by varying the supply voltage to pre-driver Q509. The current to final amplifier Q507 is also sensed, but power output is affected by this input only if current becomes excessive. Power output is then cut back to approximately 25% of full power.

Delayed PTT

Transistor Q5 02 is used to delay power output for a short time after the transmitter is keyed. This allows the synthesizer and exciter to stabilize so that the transmitter does not transmit off-frequency. The signal which controls Q502 is from microcontroller U9 on the logic board. In the receive mode this output is low, so Q502 is off. Pin 2 of U502A is then pulled high by the 7.2-volt supply applied through R511 and CR500. This causes the output on pin 1 of U502A to go low which shuts off power to Q509. Then when the transmitter is keyed, the Q502 control signal goes high after a short delay. Q502 then turns on and diode CR500 is reverse biased. Only the forward power signal is then applied to pin 2 of U502A.

Over-Current Shutdown

Current to final amplifier Q507 is monitored by sensing the voltage drop across R554. Pins 3 and 6 of U505 are connected across this resistor. As current increases, the output voltage on U505, pin 8 decreases.

5-16

Page 60

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

UHF 40W PA BOARD

rewoP

cigoL lortnoC morF

Shift

lortnoC

tnerruC

esneS

slaniF

revirD

morF FR xT eludoM FR

FR oT FR xR

eludoM

elbairaV

rotaunettA

Figure 5-5 UHF 40W PA Board Block Diagram

This causes the output voltage of voltage follower U507A to decrease. This signal is applied to Schmitt trigger U502B. When the voltage on pin 6 rises above the reference on pin 5, the output on pin 7 goes low. This lowers the power control voltage applied to U502A, pin 3 which lowers the power output to approximately 25% of full power.

5.9 UHF 40W PA BOARD

NOTE: A block diagram of the PA board is shown in Figure 5-5.

5.9.1 VARIABLE ATTENUATOR

A01Q

rwP drawoF

esneS

B01Q

annetnA

hctiwS

5.9.2 DRIVER (Q1), FINALS (Q10)

Impedance matching for driver Q1 is provided by several capacitors and sections of microstrip. Q1 is an N-channel enhancement mode lateral MOSFET. The bias voltage (which is required for the device to turn on) is controlled by the transmit signal. It is applied to the gate and controlled by the logic through shift register U501. Therefore, this device is turned off in the receive mode which improves isolation. Several capacitors, inductors, and resistors isolate this supply from RF. Likewise, the 13-volt RAW BAT supply applied to the drain is isolated by similar components.

annetnA

ssaP-woL

retliF

Two RF signals are connected to the RF module from the PA board. One is the transmit RF output signal and the other is the receive RF input signal. The transmit signal is applied to a variable attenuator on the PA board formed by CR101-CR104 and several other components. This circuit adjusts the input RF level to driver Q1 to control the power output of the PA board. CR101-CR104 are PIN diodes which have a very high impedance when they are reverse biased or in the off mode. As forward biasing current increases, the impedance decreases to a low level. Therefore, the RF level of the signal applied to driver Q1 increases as the bias current from the power control circuit increases.

From driver Q1 the signal is fed to final amplifier Q10. Various capacitors, resistors, and sections of microstrip provide input and output impedance matching for Q10. That device includes two Nchannel enhancement mode lateral MOSFETs operating in parallel and produces an output power of up to 70 watts. Gate bias is provided by the 8-volt transmit signal in a manner similar to driver Q1. A splitter circuit divides the signal on the RF signal into two inputs to this device. Then a combiner circuit on the output joins these signals together again. These splitters and combiners are formed by several capacitors, inductors, and sections of microstrip.

5-17

Page 61

UHF 40W PA BOARD (Cont’d)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

5.9.3 FORWARD POWER DETECTOR, ANTENNA SWITCH, LOW-PASS FILTER

The power control circuit senses Q10 output power to control the power output. A directional coupler senses the forward power signal. This signal is then rectified by CR105 and applied to the power control circuit. This signal is a DC voltage that increases in proportion to the level of forward power. Refer to Section 5.9.4 for more information on power control.

PIN diodes CR106 and CR401-CR403 form an antenna switch that switches the antenna to the transmitter in the transmit mode and the receiver in the receive mode. As stated in Section 5.9.1, PIN diodes have a very high impedance when in the off mode and a very low impedance when forward biased. Transistors Q401 and Q403 are on in the transmit mode and off in the receive mode.

In the transmit mode all four diodes are forward biased. The transmit signal then has a low impedance path through CR106 to the low-pass filter and is blocked from the receiver by a grounded quarter-wave line formed by C402, L401, and C403. A grounded quarter-wave lines presents a very high impedance at the non-grounded end. PIN diodes CR401 and CR403 and a second quarter-wave line formed by C409, C410, and L402 provide additional isolation.

In the receive mode, all four diodes are in the off mode. Therefore, the receive signal from the antenna is blocked from the power amplifier by CR106 and has a low impedance path through L401, C408, L402, and C401 to the receiver in the RF module.

From the antenna switch the RF signal is applied to a low-pass filter formed by L123-L125 and several capacitors and sections of microstrip. This filter attenuates harmonic frequencies above the transmit band that could cause adjacent channel interference. R300 dissipates static buildup in the antenna.

5.9.4 POWER CONTROL

Introduction

The power control circuit maintains a constant power output as changes occur in power amplifier

temperature and voltage. It does this by sensing forward power and then varying the drive to Q1 to maintain a constant output power. The drive to Q1 is controlled by varying the voltage applied to the variable attenuator circuit described in Section 5.9.1. In addition, the current applied to final amplifier Q10 is sensed, and if it becomes excessive, power is cut back to a low level.

The power output level is set in 127 steps by a D/A converter formed by shift register U501 and several resistors. This converter is controlled by the microcontroller to provide the following functions:

• It allows the RF power output level to be adjusted

using the PCTune™ software.

• It allows the microcontroller to cut back power if the

power amplifier temperature sensed by thermistor RT501 becomes excessive.

• It allows high and low power levels to be selected by

the user or to be fixed by programming using the PCConfigure™ software.

Forward Power Sense

The forward power signal from the directional coupler is applied to pin 2 of amplifier U502A. This is a DC signal that increases proportionally to forward power. The other input to U502A on pin 3 is a DC reference voltage from the D/A converter. This signal sets the power output of the transmitter.

This circuit operates as follows: Assume the output power attempts to increase. The DC voltage applied to U502A, pin 2 then increases which causes the output voltage on pin 1 to decrease. Transistors Q501 and Q502 then turn off slightly which decreases the supply voltage to the variable attenuator circuit. The Q1 input power then decreases as does the drive to Q10. The Q10 output power then decreases to maintain a constant power output. R523 and R24 limit the voltage gain of Q501 and Q502 to approximately two.

5-18

Page 62

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

UHF 40W PA BOARD (Cont’d) 800 MHz 35W PA BOARD

Delayed PTT

Transistor Q503 is used to delay power output for a short time after the transmitter is keyed. This allows the synthesizer and exciter to stabilize so that the transmitter does not transmit off frequency. The signal which controls Q503 is from microcontroller on the logic board. In the receive mode this output is low, so Q503 is off. Pin 2 of U502A is then pulled high by the 8-volt supply applied through R525 and CR503. This causes the output on pin 1 of U502A to go low which shuts off Q501 and Q502. Then when the transmitter is keyed, the Q503 control signal goes high after a short delay. Q503 then turns on and diode CR503 is reverse biased. Only the forward power signal is then applied to pin 2 of U502A.

Over-Current Shutdown

Current to final amplifier Q10 is monitored by sensing the voltage drop across R132. Pins 3 and 6 of U102 are connected across this resistor. As current increases, the output voltage on U102, pin 8 increases. This voltage is applied to Schmitt trigger U502B and when the voltage on pin 6 rises above the reference on pin 5, the output on pin 7 goes low. This lowers the power control voltage applied to U502A, pin 3 which lowers the power output to approximately 25% of full power.

5.10 800 MHz 35W PA BOARD

5.10.1 LOW POWER ANTENNA SWITCH

The RF signal from the RF board is fed by a coaxial cable to the PA board. Since both the receive and transmit signals are present on the input of the PA board, special antenna switching is required on the PA board to route the receive signal around the power amplifier section to the antenna. Both high power and a low power antenna switches are used as shown below.

Antenna

RF Board

Low Power

Antenna Switch

U603

RF Amplifier

(Rx RF)

Power

Amplifier

High Power

Antenna Switch

Low power antenna switching is provided by electronic antenna switch U603. Pin 5 is effectively connected to pin 1 when pin 6 is high (and pin 4 is low). Conversely, pin 5 is connected to pin 3 when pin 4 is high and pin 6 is low. These control signals are provided by the Q7 output of shift register U501 and inverters Q516/Q517. In the transmit mode, the signal from the RF board is then routed through C532 to the PA module, and blocked from RF amplifier Q503. In the receive mode, the opposite occurs. Refer to Section

5.10.4 for a description of the high power antenna switch.

5.10.2 POWER DETECTOR AND ATTENUATOR

The transmit RF output signal of pin 3 of antenna switch U603 is coupled by C595 to a power detector circuit formed by CR521, R591, and other components. When RF power is detected, the voltage on pin 13 of op amp U502 increases. When it rises above the reference on pin 12, the output on pin 14 goes low and turns off Q507. The base of Q505 is then no longer grounded which allows it to be controlled by the power control circuit. This provides maximum attenuation in the receive mode to minimize the amplification of any low level receive signal that may be present (see following).

A 3-dB pad formed by R541, R542, and R543 provides attenuation of the RF signal and also a 50ohm impedance. Matching between U603 and this pad is provided by C532 and L514. This pad is then matched by a section of microstrip and L503 to a limiter and variable 50-ohm attenuator formed by pin diodes* C516-C518 and other components. This attenuator provides approximately 0-20 dB attention of the RF signal input to PA module. This controls the power output of the transceiver.

The limiter section formed by CR516, CR517, C535 and biasing resistors R580/R581 attenuates high level input signals that could cause improper operation of the attenuator. The attenuator circuit is formed by CR518 and CR519 and controlled by Q505 and the rest of the power control circuit (see Section 5.10.6). Biasing of these diodes is provided by CR520, R597, R584, R582, R586, and R538 connected to the emitter of Q505. When Q505 is turned off, CR518 is reverse biased by the voltage applied through R537. It then provides maximum attenuation of the RF signal.

5-19

Page 63

800 MHz 35W PA BOARD (Cont’d)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

A shunt path is provided around CR518 by R583, C537, and R585. Pin diode CR519 is at its maximum forward biased condition when Q505 is off, and connects R583 to AC ground through C538. This maintains a constant 50-ohm impedance. Then as Q505 turns on, CR518 becomes forward biased and provides less attenuation. Likewise, CR519 becomes less forward biased which increases the impedance of the path to ground. From the attenuator the signal is coupled by C542 to a 1 dB, 50-ohm pad formed by R544-R546 and then applied to PA module U504.

5.10.3 POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE (U504),

FINAL (Q509)

Power amplifier module U504 provides approximately 19 dB of gain. Pins 2, 3, and 4 are the supply voltage inputs to three separate gain stages. The supply voltage on pin 2 (VS1) is switched by Q508 and limited to 12 volts by CR508 and R549. Switch Q508 is controlled by the same signal used to control the high power antenna switch (see Section 5.10.4).

The supply voltage applied to pins 3 and 4 (VS2/ VS3) is the unswitched battery from the power jack. Therefore, power is applied to these pins even when transceiver power is turned off.

The output signal on U504, pin 5 is then applied to final amplifier Q509 which provides about 5 dB of gain. Current to this stage flows through R550, and transmitter current is monitored by sensing the voltage drop across this resistor (see Section 5.10.6). The output impedance on U504, pin 5 is 50 ohms, and it is matched to Q509 by a section of microstrip, C556, C557, and C558. Class C biasing of Q509 is provided by L507. The unswitched battery supply applied to Q509 is isolated from RF by ferrite bead EP503, inductor L508, and several capacitors. Impedance matching is provided on the output by C559, C561, C562, C566, and a section of microstrip.

5.10.4 HIGH POWER ANTENNA SWITCH

The high power antenna switch consists of pin diodes* CR501, CR502, CR503, and other components. This switch effectively switches the antenna to the power amplifier in the transmit mode, and the receive RF amplifier path in the receive mode (see preceding illustration).

Transistors Q506 and Q501 controlled by the Q7 output of shift register U501 after it is double inverted by Q516 and Q517. This signal is high in the transmit mode and low in the receive mode. Therefore, Q506 and Q501 are on in the transmit mode which forward biases CR501, CR502, and CR503. One current path is through Q501, R503, R504, CR501, L508, CR502, and L508, and the other is through Q506, R559, CR503, and R560.

Since a forward biased pin diode has a low impedance, the RF signal passes through CR502 to the low-pass filter. The signal is blocked from the RF amplifier by two discrete grounded quarter-wave lines. One line is formed by L508/C507 and the other by L502/C514. Diode CR501 is effectively AC grounded by C507, and CR503 is AC grounded by C514. When one end of a quarter-wave line is grounded, the other end presents a high impedance to the quarter-wave frequency.

In the receive mode, all three diodes are reverse biased. Therefore, the receive signal from the antenna is blocked from the power amplifier by CR502 and has a low impedance path through the quarter-wave lines which are no longer grounded. Resistors R505 and R506 improve the isolation provided by CR501 and CR502 when they are reverse biased in the receive mode.

5.10.5 DIRECTIONAL COUPLER, LOW-PASS

FILTER, TEMP SENSE

A directional coupler is formed by adjacent sections of microstrip near C566. The forward component of output power is rectified by CR509 and developed across R557 and then fed to the power control circuit. Reverse power is not detected in this transceiver.

From the directional coupler the transmit RF signal is coupled by C511 to a low-pass harmonic filter formed by C501-C505 and several sections of microstrip. This filter attenuates harmonic frequencies occurring above the transmit band. Resistor R501 dissipates static buildup on the antenna.

The ambient power amplifier temperature is sensed by thermistor RT501. The resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases. The thermistor forms a voltage divider with R147 on the audio/

5-20

Page 64

800 MHz 35W PA BOARD (Cont’d)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

logic board, and the voltage across this divider is monitored by A/D converter U21. If the PA temperature increases above limits set in software, the power is first cut back. Then if it continues to rise, the transmitter is turned off.

5.10.6 POWER CONTROL

Introduction

The power control circuit maintains a constant power output as changes occur in temperature and voltage. It does this by sensing the forward power and then varying the output of Q505 to maintain a constant output power (see Section 5.10.2). Although curren t to final amplifier Q509 is also sensed, power output is affected by this input only if current becomes excessive. Power output is then cut back to approximately 25% of full power.

U502A Operation

U502A is a difference amplifier which amplifies the difference between the reference voltage on pin 3 and the forward power signal on pin 2. The turn-on time of U502A is controlled by the time constant of C525 and R527. This circuit operates as follows: Assume the output power attempts to increase. The DC voltage applied to U502A, pin 2 then increases which causes the output voltage on pin 1 to decrease. Transistor Q505 then turns off slightly which increases

the attenuation provided by the attenuation circuit (see Section 5.10.2). The output power then decreases to maintain a constant power output.

Delayed PTT

Transistor Q5 04 is used to delay power output for a short time after the transmitter is keyed. This allows the synthesizer and exciter to stabilize so that the transmitter does not transmit off-frequency. The signal which controls Q504 is from pin 14 of microcontroller U9 on the logic board. In the receive mode this output is low, so Q504 is off. Pin 2 of U500A is then pulled high by the 7.2-volt supply applied through R530 and CR505. This causes the output on pin 1 of U502A to go low which shuts off Q505 and produces maximum attenuation. Then when the transmitter is keyed, the Q504 control signal goes high after a short delay. Q504 then turns on and diode CR505 is reverse biased. Only the forward power signal is then applied to pin 2 of U502A.

Over-Current Shutdown

Current to final amplifier Q509 is monitored by sensing the voltage drop across R550. Pins 3 and 6 of U505 are connected across this resistor. As current increases, the output voltage on U505, pin 8 decreases. This signal is applied to Schmitt trigger U502B. When the voltage on pin 6 rises above the reference on pin 5, the output on pin 7 goes low. This lowers the power control voltage applied to U505 which lowers the power output to approximately 25% of full power.

5.10.7 RF AMPLIFIER (Q503)

The receive signal from the antenna switch is applied to bandpass filter Z501. This is a three-pole filter with a center frequency of 860 MHz and a bandwidth of 18 MHz. This filter attenuates frequencies outside the receive band such as the first injection, image, and half IF frequencies.

The signal is then applied to RF amplifier Q503 which improves and stabilizes receiver sensitivity and also recovers filter losses. A section of microstrip and C515 provide impedance matching on the input. CR504 protects the base-emitter junction of Q503 from damage caused by high level input signals.

5-21

Page 65

DC POWER DISTRIBUTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The bias current of Q503 is fixed at a constant level by Q502. The collector current of Q503 flows through R511, and the voltage drop across that resistor (and therefore the current) is set by R508 and R509. For example, if current through R2511 attempts to increase, the emitter voltage of Q502 decreases. Q502 then conducts less and turns Q503 off slightly to maintain a constant bias current. This provides a stable bias over changes in temperature. The output signal of Q503 is applied to a 3 dB, 50-ohm pad formed by R587-R589, and then coupled by C531 to antenna switch U603. From U603 it is applied to the RF board.

5.11 DC POWER DISTRIBUTION

5.11.1 POWER ON OPERATION

When the On-Off/Volume knob is pressed to turn power on (this is a push on/push off switch), the following sequence of events occurs:

1. The power switch closes and grounds the emitter of

Q8 on the logic board.

2. If ignition switch sense is used, the 13V signal from

the ignition switch is applied to the base of Q8 and pin A7 of microcontroller U6 (or pin 48 of microcontroller U9 with the Rev 3 logic board). If ignition sense is not used, pull-up resistor R145 can be installed to make the transceiver functional.

3. Q8 then turns on which grounds the base of Q512 on

the PA board and turns it on. This turns on main power switching transistor Q511 and applies power to the switched portions of the transceiver.

5.11.2 POWER OFF OPERATION

When power is turned off, the following sequence of events occur:

1. If the power switch is pressed, it opens and the base

of Q8 is no longer grounded. This also applies a high signal to the microcontroller which then detects the power-off condition.

2. If ignition switch control of power is used, turning

the ignition switch off causes the signal applied to the base of Q8 to go low. This signal is also inverted by Q5 and applied the microcontroller.

3. Q8 then turns off. However, when the controller detects the power-down request, it holds Q2 on to delay power turn-off until all the required save operations are complete.

4. The controller then turns off Q2 and both Q511 and Q512 on the PA board turn off which turns off transceiver power.

5.12 LOGIC BOARD (VERSION C)

NOTE: The following describes the Version C logic board (see Section 1.12.2). Version B is similar except that the ADSIC has been replaced by the CODEC.

5.12.1 MICROCONTROLLER (U2)

Microcontroller U57 is PowerPC

based which gives this transceiver processing power equal to some current desktop computers. This microcontroller provides all transceiver control functions except signal processing which is provided by DSP U1.

Functions provided by U57 include detecting button presses, processing incoming and outgoing calls, displaying operational data to the user, and coordinating control of the other processor (DSP).

The operating speed of U2 is controlled by

4.9152 MHz crystal Y2. The internal clock is five times this frequency or 24.575 MHz (25 MHz operational).

5.12.2 MEMORY

Memory devices include Flash, SRAM, EEPROM, and DSP SRAM. There is 8 megabyte of Flash that is used primarily for code storage but can can also be used for as non-volatile memory.

The SRAM (static RAM) consists of four 256K x 16 devices (U20/U23/U71/U72). A 32K x 8 EEPROM (U58) is used to store personality data.

5.12.3 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

OVERVIEW

The Digital Signal Processing (DSP) functions are performed by the DSP chip (U1) and the CODEC (U2) with the support of microcontroller U57. Func-

5-22

Page 66

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

tions previously performed in hardware like filtering and limiting are performed by software running in the DSP chip.

The DSP section consists of a DSP chip (U1) and the CODEC (U2). The CODEC is a support chip for the DSP. It provides the interface between the DSP and the analog signal paths, and between the DSP and the Digital IF chip on the RF Board. Configuration of the Digital IF chip is handled primarily by microcontroller U57.

In receive mode, the DSP interfaces with the Digital IF chip IC on the RF Board. The DSP collects the I and Q samples from the Digital IF chip and performs channel filtering and frequency discrimination on the signals. The resulting demodulated signal is routed to the DSP via the serial port for further processing. After the DSP processing, the signal is sent to the CODEC D/A by writing to a memorymapped register. The CODEC then converts the processed signal from the DSP to an analog signal and then outputs this signal on ASDSIC_SDO to a single ended to differential converter (U61A/B). It is then

routed to the control unit, amplified, and then sent to the speaker.

In transmit mode the microphone signal is converted to a single ended signal, filtered, and then applied to the CODEC on CODEC_IN and digitized by an internal A/D converter. The DSP reads these values from a memory-mapped register in the CODEC. After processing, the DSP sends the modulation signal to the CODEC via the serial port. In the CODEC, the VCO D/A converts the sampled modulation signal into an analog signal and then routes this signal to the VCO on the RF Board.

5.12.4 RECEIVE SIGNAL PATH

The Digital IF chip on the RF Board provides a digital back end for the receiver section. It provides a digital output of I (in phase) and Q (quadrature) samples which represent the IF signal at the receiver back end. These samples are routed to the DSP where the signal is filtered and frequency discriminated to recover the modulating signal.

5-23

Page 67

SECTION 6 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

Remote Programming Interface (RPI)

Part No. 023-5300-000

Communication

Monitor

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

SINAD Meter

Figure 6-1 Alignment Setup

6.1 GENERAL

6.1.1 INTRODUCTION

The following alignment procedure should be performed if repairs are made that could affect the factory alignment or if adjustments may have changed for some other reason. To verify radio operation, the performance tests in Sections 6.5 and 6.6 can be run.

Cable Assembly

Part No. 023-5300-005

NOTE: The ignition sense line must be connected to +13V for the radio to operate.

All adjustments are set digitally using the computer. Therefore, there is no need to disassemble the transceiver to access adjustment points. In addition, audio test signals are generated internally, so an audio generator is not required. The required test equipment is shown in Figure 6-1.

6.1.2 TUNE SOFTWARE

To Battery

To Antenna

Ign Sense

To perform transceiver alignment, the following

are required:

• PC-compatible computer

• Remote Programming Interface (RPI), Part No.

023-5300-000. Earlier RPIs, such as Part No. 0239800-000 or 023-9750-000, cannot be used. Refer to Section 4.1.3 for more RPI information.

• PCTune software, Part No. 023-9998-499.

General

The PCTune software is a Windows® program. Minimum

software and hardware requirements are as

follows:

• Windows

• Pentium

95/98/NT/2000 (3.1 cannot be used)

processor or equivalent

• 16 MB of RAM

• A hard disk drive with at least 3 MB of free space

• A CD-ROM drive

• An available serial port

6-1

Page 68

Menu Bar

To o l B a r

Radio

Information

Tun e C a te go r y

Buttons

Tuning

Instructions

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

Select Next Adjustment

Mode/Tool Tip

Figure 6-2 PCTune Main Screen

Software Installation

Proceed as follows to install this software:

1. Close all applications that are currently running (other than Windows).

2. Insert the CD-ROM containing the PCTune software into the drive.

3. From the Windows taskbar, choose RUN and open SETUP.EXE on the drive being used. Alternatively, use File Explorer and double click SETUP.EXE.

4. Follow the instructions on the screen. The program is automatically loaded on the hard drive and startup shortcuts or groups are created.

On-Line Help

On-line help is currently not available.

6.1.3 PCTUNE VERSION REQUIRED

PCTune, Version 2.0.0 or later is required to tune the current RF board. The version number can be displayed by selecting the Help > About menu.

6.2 MAIN SCREEN

The main PCTune screen is shown in Figure 6-2. Information on the various parts of this screen follows:

Starting PCTune

Select Start in the taskbar, then Programs >

PCTune > PCTune.

Exiting PCTune

Select File > Exit or click the button.

Menu Bar - Used to select the menus described in Sections 6.3.1-6.3.5.

Tool B ar - These buttons are used to quickly select functions as follows:

- Displays the screen used to set serial port

parameters (see Section 6.3.3).

6-2

Page 69

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

- Selects the Partial Tune mode the same as

the Transfer > Tune Partial menu (see Section

6.3.3) This mode allows manual selection of the desired Tune Category and then automatically steps through the various settings for that adjustment.

- Selects the Edit Mode which allows parameters in the selected screen to be changed without stepping through each adjustment.

- Reads and displays the current parameters programmed in the radio the same as the Radio > Read Tune Parameters menu (see Section

6.3.3).

- Writes the current tune parameters to the radio the same as the Transfer > Write Tune Parameters menu (see Section 6.3.3). This occurs automatically when a Partial Tune adjustment is completed.

- Exits the current Tune Category without

writing parameters to the radio.

Tuning Categories

These buttons select the tuning adjustment to be performed. Different functions are displayed for the 51xx and 53xx. If the Partial tune mode is selected, these buttons select the particular adjustment that is performed.

Mode/Tool Tip

Information on the bottom line of the screen indicates the current tune mode and information on the selected button on other information.

6.3 MENU BAR DESCRIPTION

6.3.1 FILE MENU

Selecting File > Exit closes the PCTune program.

6.3.2 RADIO MENU

Radio Information

When tuning parameters are read from a radio by clicking the button or selecting the Transfer > Read Parameters menu, the following information is displayed in the top part of the screen:

- The Radio Series selected by the Radio

Type menu (see Section 6.3.2). The correct series must be selected for communication with the radio to occur.

Band

- The radio frequency band of the radio displayed after information is read from radio. Do not select the band using T ools > Set Band (Section

6.3.4) because this may make the radio nonfunctional.

Software DSP

- The first number is the version number of the radio firmware (Flash/operating code), and the second number is the version number of the DSP software.

ESN

- The Electronic Serial Number electronically

stored in the radio.

The Radio menu shown above selects the radio type. Select “5100” for the 51SL and Ascend portable, and select “5300” for the 53SL and Ascend mobile. The correct radio type must be selected for communication with the radio to occur.

6.3.3 TRANSFER MENU

COM Ports - Displays the following screen which selects the serial port (1-12) and baud rate (9600/

19200) used for communication with the radio. Select the computer port to which the test cable is connected (see Section 6.4.1), and 19200 baud is normally

6-3

Page 70

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

selected. These parameters default to the last selected condition the next time the program is started.

Read Tune Parameters - Selecting this function or clicking the button reads the tune parameters currently programmed in the transceiver and displays them in the various screens.

NOTE: Values in the various screens are for reference only and adjustments should be done only by using the Partial Tune function.

Write Tune Parameters - Selecting this function or clicking the button writes the current tune parameters to the radio. This occurs automatically when a Partial Tune adjustment is completed.

Tune Complete - Currently not available. This function automatically steps through all the tests required to tune the radio.

Tune Partial - Selecting this function or clicking the

button selects the Partial Tune mode. This mode automatically steps through all the adjustments of the currently selected Tune Category.

Set Band - Selects the operating band of the radio. All tuning values are reset to the factory defaults.

CAUTION: Do not select this function because it can make the radio non-functional.

Reset Passwords - Erases all password information contained in the radio. This function can be used, for example, to allow reprogramming of passwords if they are lost. NOTE: Radio personality information is not

erased by this function.

Erase EEPROM

CAUTION: This function erases important radio programming information as described below.

Complete

- Erases all EEPROM information,

including factory programmed parameters.

CAUTION: Do not select this function

because the radio must be returned to the factory to make it operational again.

Parms Only

- Erases all personality information.

NOTE: The radio must be reprogrammed after this function is selected.

Tx/Rx Tests - Selects a screen which is used to check digital (P25) receive and transmit performance. Refer to Section 6.5 for more information.

Restore Rx Front End Parameters - Programs the radio with default receive front end tune parameters. Other parameters remain unchanged.

6.3.4 TOOLS MENU

Reset Radio - Resets the radio control logic similar to cycling power. This can be used, for example, to change the radio series or band or exit an adjustment before it is complete.

6.3.5 HELP MENU

Displays the version number of the PCTune

software and other information.

6.4 TUNING PROCEDURE

6.4.1 CONNECTING TEST SETUP

1. With transceiver power turned off, connect the RPI to an unused serial port of the computer using a suitable cable (see Section 4.1.3).

2. Connect the RPI to the microphone jack of the transceiver using programming cable, Part No. 023-5300-005 (see Figure 6-1).

6-4

Page 71

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

3. If the receiver squelch adjustment will be made, connect a SINAD meter to the Speaker Audio Out jack on the RPI (see Figure 6-3). This is a low level fixed audio output, and a 2.6 mm (3/32”) phone jack is used.

4. Connect a wattmeter and a suitable load to the antenna jack of the transceiver for the transmitter tests. For the receiver tests, connect the signal generator to the antenna jack through a 6 dB or greater isolation pad.

Front Panel

10-Pin Radio Cable

Connector

Power

Indicator

Mic Audio In

Jack

Spkr Audio

Out Jack

Figure 6-3 RPI Front Panel

6.4.2 STARTING AND CONFIGURING PCTUNE

1. Start the program as described in Section 6.1.2 and turn transceiver power on. Select Transfer > COM Port and make sure that the correct serial port and the 19200 baud rate are selected (see Section 6.3.3).

• To perform these tests, a Digital Communication

Analyzer such as Motorola R2670 or IFR 2975 is required.

• These tests follow the TIA-102-CAAA-A “Digital

C4FM/CQPSK Transceiver Measurement Methods” specification. Refer to that document for more information.

• A P25 conventional channel preprogrammed by the

PCConfigure software is used for testing. The PCTune software does not select a specific test channel. The test channel must be programmed with the following options:

NAC - 293 (hex) TGID (Talk Group ID) - 1 Frequency - Any frequency in radio operating

band

6.5.2 RECEIVE TEST SETUP

1. Connect the test setup and start and configure the PCTune software as described in Section 6.4. Select the T ools > Tx/Rx Tests menu to display the Tx/Rx Tests screen. Then in the Test Type drop-down list select Receive to display the following screen.

2. Select the Radio menu and make sure the correct radio series (53xx) is selected (see Section 6.3.2).

3. Select Transfer > Partial Tune and click the button for the desired Test Category.

4. Follow the instructions displayed on the scree n to complete the various adjustments required for a particular setting. Then repeat for other applicable Test Categories. (The “Pendulum” test sets the TCXO frequency.)

6.5 DIGITAL PERFORMANCE TESTS

6.5.1 GENERAL

This section describes how to check the performance of the radio on digital Project 25 channels. The PCTune software inc ludes a T ool s > Tx/Rx T ests menu that displays the screen used for these tests.

2. Connect the Digital Communication Monitor to the antenna jack using a 6 dB or greater isolation pad. Set the Monitor output for the “1011” test pattern.

6.5.3 RECEIVE SENSITIVITY TEST

1. A tone should be heard from the radio speaker if the analyzer is set properly. Select the “Short” or

6-5

Page 72

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

“Long” test in the T est drop down list and the radio should mute.

2. Set the analyzer output level for 0.35 µV (–116 dBm) at the receiver antenna jack

. The BER (Bit Error Rate) should be 5% or less. (This is a ratio of the receive bit errors to the total number of bits transmitted.)

3. Increase the analyzer output level to 1000 µV (–47 dBm). The BER rate should be less than 0.01%. This is the BER Rate Floor.

6.5.4 TRANSMITTER TESTS

1. If applicable select the T ools > Tx/Rx T ests menu to display the Tx/Rx Tests screen. Then in the Test Type drop-down list select Transmit to display the following screen. Connect a dummy load to the radio antenna jack. Monitor the transmit signal with the Digital Communication Monitor.

6. The “Silence” test transmits a standard silence test

pattern which produces no receive audio output by the receiving radio. This tone can also be used to test other radios.

7. Select “Normal” to transmit a standard voice signal

by speaking into the radio microphone.

6.6 ANALOG PERFORMANCE TESTS

6.6.1 GENERAL

The PCTune software is not used for analog channel performance testing. Simply program the desired channels using the PCConfigure software as described in Section 4. The RPI is still required to monitor the audio output signal from the radio.

Depending on the application, 12.5 kHz, 25 kHz, and NPSPAC (800 MHz) test channels may need to be programmed. Also, test channels programmed with or without Call Guard

(CTCSS/DCS) squelch control

may be required.

2. Select the Low Deviation test and set the analyzer

as required to measure transmitter deviation. This test generates continuous repetitions of bits

10100000. Deviation should be 848-1037 Hz.

3. Click the “PTT” button to transmit the tone. When finished, click that button again to turn the transmitter off.

4. Select the “High Deviation” test which transmits a standard transmitter test pattern. Deviation should be 2544-3111 Hz.

5. The “1011 Hz” test transmits a standard 1011 Hz tone similar to that used for the receiver test. This tone can be used to check the operation of other radios.

6.6.2 RECEIVER PERFORMANCE TESTS

1. Connect a signal generator to the antenna jack using a 6 dB or greater pad. Set the output for the channel frequency, modulated with 1 kHz at the following deviation:

12.5 kHz Channels - 1.5 kHz 25 kHz Channels - 3.0 kHz 800 MHz NPSPAC Channels - 2.4 kHz

2. Connect a SINAD meter to the receive audio jack of the RPI (see Figure 6-3) This is a low level fixed audio output.

SINAD Sensitivity

3. Set the signal generator output level for 1000 µV (–47 dBm) at the antenna jack

4. Decrease the signal generator output to obtain 12 dB SINAD. The signal generator output should be 0.35 µV (–116 dBm) or less for 25 kHz channels, or 0.50 µV (–113 dBm) or less for 12.5 kHz channels.

6-6

Page 73

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

Audio Power Output and Distortion

5. Connect a distortion meter across the speaker load. Return the generator output to 1000 µV. Distortion should be 3% or less.

Squelch Sensitivity

6. Increase the signal generator output from zero and note the SINAD when unsquelching occurs. It should be approximately 8 dB.

6.6.3 TRANSMITTER PERFORMANCE TESTS

1. Connect a wattmeter and dummy load to the antenna jack. Monitor the transmit signal with a communication monitor.

Transmit Frequency

2. Monitor the transmit frequency and at room temperature it should ±100 Hz. At other temperatures (–30 to +60° C), it must be within 2.5 PPM (VHF/UHF) or 1.5 PPM (800 MHz). This also checks the receiv e frequency.

Transmit Power

3. Transmit power should be in the following ranges. High and low levels can be preset anywhere in this

range by PCTune. The factory default for high power is the maximum shown below , and low power is half that value.

VHF Standard - 10-50 watts VHF 100W - 50-100 watts UHF 15W - 7-15 watts UHF 40W - 10-40 watts 800 MHz - 10-35 watts

Transmit Modulation

4. Monitor the transmit modulation with a modulation meter. Speak into the microphone with a normal voice. Modulation should be approximately as follows with no CTCSS/DCS signaling present:

12.5 kHz Channels - 1.4 kHz 25 kHz Channels - 3.4 kHz 800 MHz NPSPAC Channels - 2.5 kHz

5. Select a channel programmed with Call Guard (CTCSS/DCS) signaling. Maximum total Call Guard and voice modulation should be approximately as follows:

12.5 kHz Channels - 2.3 kHz 25 kHz Channels - 4.7 kHz 800 MHz NPSPAC Channels - 3.8 kHz

6-7

Page 74

SECTION 7 PARTS LIST

Chassis, Hardware, Misc.

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

CHASSIS, HARDWARE, AND

MISCELLANEOUS

A 200 Interface board assembly Ver B

(see separate listing which follows) Interface board assembly Ver C

(see separate listing which follows)

A 300 Rx/exciter assembly (VHF, Ver B)

(see separate listing on page 7-3) Rx/exciter assembly (UHF, Ver B)

(see listing on page 7-3) Rx/exciter assembly (UHF, Ver C)

(see listing on page 7-3) Rx/exciter assy (800 MHz, Ver B)

(see listing on page 7-3)

A 301 Accessory pigtail cable (internal) 597-2002-230

Acc pigtail cable w/EMI filter 023-5300-630 A 302 Remote/acc pigtail cable (internal) 597-2002-249 A 303 Remote pigtail cable (internal for

second control unit) A 400 ARM logic board assembly, Ver A

(see separate listing on page 7-19)

PPC logic board assembly, Ver B

(see separate listing on page 7-25)

PPC logic board assembly, Ver C

(see separate listing on page 7-31) A 500 VHF 50W PA bd assy 50W mod.

(see separate listing on page 7-5) VHF 50W PA bd assy 100W mod.

(see separate listing on page 7-5) UHF 15W PA board assembly

(see separate listing on page 7-9) UHF 40W PA bd assembly

(see separate listing on page 7-12) 800 MHz 35W PA board assembly

(see separate listing on page 7-15) A510 VHF 100W PA board assembly

(see separate listing on page 7-8 A 810 Front panel assembly (frt mt)

(see separate listing on page 7-38)

CH 101 Chassis, std VHF/800 models 015-0970-001

Chassis, std UHF models 015-0970-002

Chassis, 100W VHF models 015-0970-011

023-5300-211

023-5500-200

023-5317-212

023-5337-202

023-5567-212

023-5387-212

597-2002-251

023-5300-421

023-5300-6xx

023-5500-600

023-5315-531

023-5315-521

023-5335-511

023-5365-501

023-5385-501

023-5315-510

023-5300-810

Ref No. Description Part No.

EP 001 No. 6 terminal lug 586-0005-106 EP 002 Ferrite bead, .375 x .375 517-2002-003 EP 003 Ferrite block (for J200) 517-2002-020 EP 920 Snubber, bot shield for encryp mod 018-1134-136

HW 001 Captive screw , cover 537-9007-045 HW 002 Screw, 6-32 x 5/16 Torx 575-0006-010 HW 003 Plug, option (in unused chass hole) 032-0792-075 HW 004 Audio amp U1 clip 017-9700-001 HW 005 O-ring, 1/8 x 1/4 cover screw 574-2002-001 HW 006 Nylon washer, cover screw 596-4408-015 HW 007 Split rubber grommet 1/8ID 574-0002-015 HW 009 Flat washer, cover screw 596-9408-009 HW 010 Screw, 4-40 x 5/16 phil pan hd 575-0604-010 HW 011 Washer, No 4 split lock 596-1304-0 08 HW 012 Washer, No. 4 split lock 596-1304-008 HW 020 1/4 x 1.20 x 1.90 urethane pad 018-1007-250 HW 150 Screw, 4-40 x 5/16 phil pan hd 575-0604-010 HW 151 Screw, 6-32 x 3/8 phil flat hd 575-8206-012 HW 152 Screw, 8-32 x 3/8 hex socket hd 575-9076-012 HW 202 Screw, 4-40 x 1-1/8 mach pan hd 575-1604-036 HW 501 Screw, 4-40 x 3/16 flathead 575-1204-006 HW 502 Screw, 4-40 x 3/8 flathead 575-1204-012

J 002 RF – PA board connector 515-9006-110 J 200 Connector, 28-pin inline header 515-7181-038

MP 002 Cover, top black MP 003 Cover, bottom black MP 004 Gasket, blank front panel (remote) 032-0792-068 MP 005 Front panel, blank (remote) 032-0792-005 MP 151 Cover, 100W heatsink 017-9700-007 MP 152 Gasket, 100W heatsink cover 018-1136-142 MP 153 Gasket, 100W heatsink coax 018-1136-144 MP 156 Gasket, top cover 018-1136-136 MP 157 Gasket, bottom cover 018-1136-134 MP 300 Foam tape, dbl side 574-3002-013 MP501 Shield, coax gnd (800 MHz) 017-2226-017 MP 502 Shield, low-pass filter (800 MHz) 017-2226-036 MP 503 Grounding finger (800 MHz) 537-5001-010 MP 504 Grounding clip (800 MHz) 537-5001-004

015-0970-007C 015-0970-009C

7-1

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 75

Interface Board Assembly

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

MP 505 Grounding clip (rx/ex assy) 017-9700-003

Shield (800 MHz) 017-2227-063

RF Shield (for Ver C radios) 017-2227-065 MP 506 Transistor ground tab (800 MHz) 017-2225-527 MP 601 Shield, low-pass filter wrap around 017-9700-010 MP 602 Cover, low-pass filter cover 017-9700-011

NP 001 Label, RS 5300 559-5300-100 NP 002 Label, EFJohnson 559-9001-310

W 103 Cable assy, display - logic bd 0 23-5300-025 W 110 W 501 Pwr pigtail cable assembly, std PA 597-2002 -2 35

W 502 RF pigtail cable assembly, std PA 597-2002-240

Interface pigtail, motorcycle F DB25

PA-PA pwr cable assy, 100W PA 597-2002-238

RF pigtail cable assy, 100W PA 597-2002-239

597-2002-280

INTERFACE BOARD (VER A/B)

Part No. 023-5300-211

C 002 470 µF 25V electrolyt ic 510-4064-471 C 003 100 µF 25V electrolyt ic 510-4425-101 C 004 1.0 µF 10V tantalum smd 510-2624-109 C 005 .1 µF ±5% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3609-104 C 006 .1 µF ±5% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3609-104 C 007 .1 µF ±5% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3609-104 C 009 470 pF ±5% NPO cer smd 510-3602-471 C 010 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3606-104 C 011 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3606-104 C 012 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3606-104 C 013 4.7 µF 10V tantalum smd 510-2624-479 C 014 4.7 µF 10V tantalum smd 510-2624-479 C 015 .01 µF ±5% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3609-103

CR 001 10V zener SOT-23 523-2016-100 CR 002 Switching diode SOT-23 523-1504-002

J 201 Connector, 20-pin 515-7111-230 J 202 Connector, 30-pin 515-7106-430

P 100 Header, 2-pin friction lock 515-9031-201 P 101 Header, 3-pin friction lock 515-9031-202 P 102 Header, 3-pin friction lock 515-9031-202 PC 201 PC board, interface revision 2 Q 001 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 002 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658

035-5300-200 2

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 002 2.2 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-229 R 003 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103 R 004 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-473 R 005 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103 R 006 7.5k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-752 R 008 1k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-102 R 009 1k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-102 R 010 1k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-102 R 011 10k ohm ±1% 1/8W sm d 569-0111-401 R 012 35.7k ohm ±1% 1/8W smd 569-0111-454 R 013 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 014 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 015 Zero ohm jumper 569-0115-001 R 016 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 017 3k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-302 R 018 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 019 Zero ohm jumper 569-0115-001 R 020 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 021 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 022 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103

U 001 Audio amp, 22W TDA1519 544-2004-003 U 002 Voltage regulator, adjust TK11900 544-2603-093 U 003 Op amp, dual LM2904 544-2019-004 U 004 Dig potentiometer, 2-ch AD8402 544-000 4-213

INTERFACE BOARD (VER C)

Part No. 023-5500-200

C 002 470 µF 25V electrolytic 510-4064-471 C 003 100 µF 25V electrolytic 510-4425-101 C 004 1.0 µF 10V tantalum smd 510-2624-109 C 005 .1 µF ±5% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3609-104 C 006 .1 µF ±5% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3609-104 C 007 .1 µF ±5% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3609-104 C 009 470 pF ±5% NPO cer smd 5 10-360 2-471 C 010 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3606-104 C 011 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3606-104 C 012 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3606-104 C 013 4.7 µF 10V tantalum smd 510-2624-479 C 014 4.7 µF 10V tantalum smd 510-2624-479 C 015 .01 µF ±5% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3609-103 C 028 1 µF ±5% X7R 16V cer smd 510-360 6-1 05 C 029 470 pF ±10% 25V cer smd 510-3681-471

7-2

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 76

PARTS LIST

Receiver/Exciter AssemblyInterface Board Assembly (Version C)

Ref No. Description Part No.

CR 001 10V zener SOT-23 523-2016-100 CR 002 Switching diode SOT-23 523-1504-002

J 201 Connector, 20-pin 515-7111-230 J 202 Connector, 30-pin 515-7106-430

L 001 270 nH smd inductor 542-9017-274 L 002 270 nH smd inductor 542-9017-274 L 003 270 nH smd inductor 542-9017-274

P 100 Header, 2-pin friction lock 515-9031-201 P 101 Header, 3-pin friction lock 515-9031-202 P 102 Header, 3-pin friction lock 515-9031-202 PC 001 PC board, interface revision 2

Q 001 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 002 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 003 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 004 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658

R 002 2.2 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-229 R 003 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 004 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-473 R 005 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 006 7.5k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-752 R 008 1k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-102 R 009 1k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-102 R 010 1k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-102 R 011 39k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0155-393 R 012 12k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0155-123 R 013 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 014 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 015 Zero ohm jumper 569-0115-001 R 016 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 017 3k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-302 R 018 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 019 Zero ohm jumper 569-0115-001 R 020 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 021 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 022 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 023 12k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-123 R 024 12k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0155-123 R 025 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0155-203 R 026 13k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0155-133 R 027 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103

035-5500-200 2

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 028 100k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0115-104 R 029 100k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0115-104 R 030 100k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0115-104 R 031 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 032 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 033 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 034 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 035 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 036 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 037 39k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0155-393 R 038 470 ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0155-471 R 039 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0155-103 R 040 470 ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0155-471 R 041 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0155-103

U 001 Audio amp, 22W TDA1519 544-2004-003 U 002 Voltage regulator, adj REG103UA 544-2603-057 U 003 Op amp, dual LM2904 544-2019-004 U 004 Dig potentiometer, 2-ch AD8402 544-000 4-213 U 006 Voltage regulato r, adj REG103UA 544-2603-057 U 007 Multiplexer, triple 4053 544-1014-053 U 008 Voltage regulato r, adj REG103UA 544-2603-057 U 009 CPLD prog logic device XC2C64 544-5001-420 U 010 Op amp, dual LM2904 544-2019-004

RECEIVER/EXCITER ASSEMBLY

(VERSION A/B)

Part No. 023-53x7-202/-212

A 001 Interconnect board assy, unrevised

(see separate listing which follows) Interconnect board assy, revised

(see separate listing which follows)

A 002 RF board assembly, VHF unrevised 585-0400-003

RF board assembly, VHF revised 585-5100-003 RF board assy, UHF unrevised 587-0400-005 RF board assy, UHF revised 585-5100-005 RF board assy, 800 MHz unrevised 587-5000-0 03 RF board assy, 800 MHz revised 585-510 0-009

A 216 Flex circuit, revised RF to logic bd 035-5100-050

EP 001 0.2 x 0.2 fish paper 018-1080-020 HW 001 Screw, 2-56 x 3/16 pan hd 5 75-160 2-006 HW 002 Screw, 4-40 x 1/4 pan hd 575-1604-0 08

023-5300-050

023-5300-055

7-3

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 77

Receiver/Exciter Assembly

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

HW 003 Lockwasher, internal 596-2102-006 HW 004 Washer, split lock #4 ZPS 596-1304-008

MP 002 Metal RF board housing 015-0970-004 MP 003 Cover for housing MP2 015-0970-005 MP 004 H-clip for RF board (unrevised bd) 017-2229-509

Grounding clip (revised bd) 537-5001-005 P 001 Jumper, flex 515-9500-005 W 001 Coax assy, right angle 597-3008-001

INTERCONNECT BOARD ASSEMBLY

Part No. 023-5300-050/-055

C 001 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 002 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 003 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 004 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 005 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 007 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 008 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 009 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 010 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 011 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 012 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 014 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 016 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 017 .1 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 018 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 019 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 020 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 021 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 022 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 024 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 025 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 026 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 027 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 028 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 029 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 030 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390

EP 001 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-002 EP 002 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-002 J 001 Connector, 2 x 10-pin (unrevised) 515-7113-070

Connector, 20-pin ZIF (revised bd) 515-7111-520 J 002 Connector, 30-pin 515-7111-430 MP 011 Contact, power (unrevised bd) 013-1724-001

Ref No. Description Part No.

PC 001 PC board, interconnect (revised) 035-5300-050 PC 011 Flex circuit, power (unrevised bd) 035-1800-180 R 002 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103

UHF RX/EXCITER ASSEMBLY

(VERSION C)

Part No. 023-5567-212

A 001 Interconnect board assembly

(see separate listing which follows)

A 100 RF board assembly, UHF 585-5500-300

HW 001 Screw, 2-56 x 3/16 pan hd 5 75-160 2-006 HW 002 Screw, 4-40 x 1/4 pan hd 575-1604-0 08 HW 003 Lockwasher, internal 596-2102-006 HW 004 Washer, split lock #4 ZPS 596-1304-008

MP 002 Metal RF board housing 015-0970-014 MP 003 Cover for housing MP2 015-0970-015 MP 004 Grounding clip 537-5001-005

W 001 Coax assy, right angle 597-3008-001

INTERCONNECT BOARD ASSEMBLY

Part No. 023-5500-050

C 001 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 002 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 005 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 007 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 008 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 009 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 011 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 012 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 014 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 016 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 017 .1 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 018 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 019 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 020 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 021 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 022 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 024 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 025 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 026 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390

023-5500-050

7-4

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 78

VHF 50W PA Board Assembly

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 027 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 028 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390 C 029 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3674-390

EP 001 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-002 EP 002 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-002 J 001 Connector, 26-pin ZIF (revised bd) 515-7111-526 J 002 Connector, 30-pin 515-7111-430

PC 001 PC board, interconnect rev 1

R 005 0 ohm jumper 569-0165-001 R 007 0 ohm jumper 569-0165-001 R 008 0 ohm jumper 569-0165-001

035-5500-0501

VHF 50W PA BOARD ASSEMBLY

Part No. 023-5315-521 (100W Models)

Part No. 023-5315-531 (50W Models)

C 501 12 pF ±10% 50V high Q sm d 510-3663-1 20 C 502 10 pF 250V mini mica (-521) 510-0019-100

10 pF ±10% 50V hi Q smd (-531) 5 10-3663-100 C 503 22 pF ±10% 50V high Q sm d 510-3663-2 20 C 504 12 pF 250V mini mica (-521) 510-0019-120

12 pF ±10% 50V hi Q smd (-531) 5 10-3663-120 C 505 22 pF ±10% 50V high Q sm d 510-3663-2 20 C 506 10 pF 250V mini mica (-521) 510-0019-100

10 pF ±10% 50V hi Q smd (-531) 5 10-3663-100 C 507 8.2 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-829 C 508 300 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-301 C 509 12 pF ±10% 50V high Q sm d 510-3663-1 20 C 510 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 511 300 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-301 C 512 33 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-330 C 513 12 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-120 C 515 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 516 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 517 51 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer (-531) 510-3601-510

51 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer (-521) 510-3615-510 C 518 .01 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 519 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 520 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 521 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 522 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 523 33 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-330

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 524 120 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-121 C 526 .01 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 527 30 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 528 .01 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 529 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 530 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3606-104 C 531 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3606-104 C 532 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 533 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 534 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 535 240 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-241 C 536 51 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-510 C 537 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-101 C 538 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 540 4.7 µF 25V tantalum smd 510-2627-479 C 541 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 542 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 543 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 544 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 545 130 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-131

(revised bd)

120 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-121

(unrevised bd) C 546 120 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-121 C 547 150 pF ±10% 50V high Q (-521) 510-3663-151

220 pF ±10% 50V high Q (-531) 510-3663-221

(revised bd)

100 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-101

(unrevised bd) C 548 300 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-301 C 549 220 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-221 C 550 220 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-221 C 551 220 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-221 C 552 220 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-221 C 553 220 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-221 C 554 56 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-560

(revised bd)

300 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-301

(unrevised bd) C 555 56 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-560

(revised bd)

300 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-301

(unrevised bd) C 556 120 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-121

(revised bd)

7-5

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 79

VHF 50W PA Board Assembly (Cont’d)

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

240 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-241 (unrevised bd)

C 557 120 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-121

(revised bd) 240 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-241 (unrevised bd)

C 558 100 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-101

(revised bd)

100 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-101

(unrevised bd)

C 559 100 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-101

(revised bd) 100 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-101 (unrevised bd)

C 560 39 pF ±10% 50V high Q (-531) or 510-3663-390

33 pF ±10% 50V high Q (-531) or 510-3663-330 43 pF ±10% 50V high Q (-531) or 510-3663-430 47 pF ±10% 50V high Q (-531) 5 10-3663-470 43 pF ±10% 50V high Q (-521) 5 10-3663-430 (revised bd) 43 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-430 (unrevised bd)

C 561 0.1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3606-104 C 562 300 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-301 C 563 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 564 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 565 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 566 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-183 C 567 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-1 83 C 568 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 569 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 570 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-1 83 C 571 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 572 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-1 83 C 573 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 574 1500 µF 25V electrolytic 510-4055-152 C 577 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3606-104 C 579 10 µF 25V tantalum smd 510-2627-100 C 580 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 581 .01 µF ±5% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3609-103 C 582 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 583 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 585 470 µF 16V electrolyt ic 510-4056-471 C 588 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 589 470 µF 16V electrolytic 510-4056-471 C 590 1500 µF 25V electrolytic 510-4055-152 C 591 .01 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 593 .001 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-102 C 594 .001 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-102 C 597 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-101 C 598 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-101 C 599 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-101 C 600 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-101 C 608 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-101 C 609 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-101 C 611 27 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-270 C 612 56 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-560 C 613 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 614 47 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-470 C 615 47 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 5 10-366 3-470 C 616 150 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-151 C 617 150 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-151 C 618 200 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-201 C 620 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 621 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-390 C 622 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 650 100 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-101 C 655 100 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-101 C 660 27 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-270 C 680 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3602-301

CR 501 Pin diode 523-1504-032 CR 502 Pin diode 523-1504-032 CR 503 Pin switching diode 523-1504-001 CR 506 Switching diode SOT-23 523-1504-002 CR 508 Switching diode SOT-23 523-1504-002 CR 509 Switching diode SOT-23 523-1504-002 CR 510 HC diode 523-1504-016 CR511 Pin switching diode 523-1504-001 CR 512 Pin switching diode 523-1504-001 CR 513 Pin switching diode 523-1504-001 CR 514 Transient suppressor 523-2906-001 CR 515 Schottky power 3A,40V 523-0519-032

EP 501 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010 EP 502 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010 EP 503 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-002

J 501 Connector, 20-pin 515-7111-230

7-6

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 80

VHF 50W PA Board Assembly (Cont’d)

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

J 502 Connector, SMT receptacle 515-7111-470

L 501 2T inductor 016-0020-082 L 502 2T inductor 016-0020-082 L 503 2T inductor 016-0020-082 L 504 10T inductor 016-0020-050 L 505 10T inductor 542-0030-010 L 506 1.0 µH ±5% smd 542-9000-109 L 507 1.0 µH ±5% smd 542-9000-109 L 509 10T 43 nH smd 542-0030-010 L 510 10T 43 nH smd 542-0030-010 L 511 4T nH inductor 542-0020-034 L 512 330 nH inductor smd 542-9003-338 L 514 10T 43 nH smd 542-0030-010 L 515 10T 43 nH smd 542-0030-010 L 516 Air dielectric inductor 016-0020-058 L 517 4T .08 diameter inductor 542-0020-034 L 518 4T.08 diameter inductor 542-0020-034 L 519 70 µH DC line filter 542-5010-003 L 520 100 µH 3A torrid inductor 542-5010 -016 L 521 50 µH 3A torrid inductor 542-5010-013

MP 501 Line choke tie-down bracket 017-9700-005 PC 501 PA board, VHF rev 7

Q 501 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 504 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 505 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 506 PNP power Darlington amp 576-0007-013 Q 507 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 508 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 509 NPN RF power 576-0004-111 Q 510 NPN RF power 75W, 175 MHz 576-0004-053 Q 511 PNP power Darlington 576-0007-013 Q 512 PNP switching 576-0003-612 Q 513 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 514 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658

R 501 220k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0105-224 R 502 220k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0105-224 R 503 220 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-221 R 505 100 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-1 01 R 506 100 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-1 01 R 507 220k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0105-224 R 508 4.7k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-472

035-5315-500 7

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 509 68k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-683 R 510 2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-202 R 511 0 ohm jumper 569-0105-001 R 512 0 ohm jumper 569-0105-001 R 513 3.9k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-392 R 519 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-473 R 520 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-203 R 521 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-203 R 522 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103 R 523 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-203 R 524 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103 R 525 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-203 R 526 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103 R 527 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-203 R 528 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103 R 529 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-203 R 530 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103 R 531 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-203 R 532 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103 R 533 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-203 R 534 220k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0105-224 R 535 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103 R 536 2.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-222 R 537 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103 R 538 18k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-183 R 539 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-473 R 540 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103 R 541 1.8k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-182 R 542 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 543 4.3k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-432 R 544 4.3k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-432 R 545 6.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-622 R 546 330 ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-331 R 547 470k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0105-474 R 548 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103 R 549 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-203 R 550 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 551 18k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-183 R 552 68k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-683 R 553 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 554 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd (-531) 569-0105-101

0 ohm jumper (-521) 569-0105-001 R 555 4.7k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-472 R 556 10 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-100 R 557 100 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-1 01

7-7

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 81

PARTS LIST

VHF 50W PA Board Assembly (Cont’d) VHF 100W PA Board Assembly

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 558 18k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-183 R 559 51 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-510 R 560 51 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-510 R 561 .015 ohm ±5% 2W smd 569-2020-157 R 562 200 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-201 R 563 200 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-201 R 564 4.7k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd (-531) 569-0115-472

5.1k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd (-521) 569-0115-512 R 565 330 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-331 R 566 100 ohm ±5% 0.75W smd 569-0135-101 R 567 68k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-683 R 568 39k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd (-531) 569-0105-394 15k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd (-521) 569-0105-153

(revised bd) 100k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-104

(unrevised bd) R 569 68k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-683 R 570 470 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-471 R 571 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-101 R 572 1.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-122 R 573 1.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-122 R 574 100k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0105-104 R 575 560 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-561 R 576 1.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-122 R 577 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-473 R 578 3.01k ohm ±1% 1/8W smd 569-0111-347 R 579 1.27k ohm 1% 1/8W smd 569-0111-311 R 580 680 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-681 R 581 18k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-183 R 582 68k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-683 R 583 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 584 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-203 R 585 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 586 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 587 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 588 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 589 820 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-821

RT 501 Thermistor, 10k ohm ±5% smd 569-3013-007

U 501 Shift reg, 8-stage MC4094 544-3016-094 U 502 Op amp, dual LM2904 544-2019-004 U 505 Current sense amp MAX472ESA 544-2039-002 U 506 Switching regulator, 3A MC33166 544-2003-102 U 507 Op amp, dual LM2904 544-2019-004

Ref No. Description Part No.

VHF 100W PA BOARD ASSEMBLY

Part No. 023-5315-510

A 120 Power pigtail cable assembly 023-5315-120

includes:

Housing, 75-amp red 515-9032-559 Contact, 50-amp 10/12 AWG 515-9032-561 Housing, 75-amp black 515-9032-557 Connector boot, power 8 AWG 574-9025-015

Power cable 597-2002-236 C 002 20 pF 250V mini mica 510-0020-200 C 003 43 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-430 C 005 180 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-181 C 006 180 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-181 C 007 .01µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 008 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 009 22 µF 16V tantalum smd 510-2625-220 C 010 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 011 .01µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 013 .01µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 014 270 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-271 C 015 270 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-271 C 017 82 pF 250V mini-mica 510-0019-820 C 018 56 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-560 C 019 14 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-140 C 021 .01µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 023 20 pF 250V mini mica 510-0020-200 C 024 47 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-470 C 026 180 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-181 C 027 180 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-181 C 028 .01µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 029 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 030 22 µF 16V tantalum smd 510-2625-220 C 031 300 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-301 C 032 .01µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 034 .01µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 035 270 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-271 C 036 270 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-271 C 038 82 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-820 C 039 56 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-560 C 040 14 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-140

CH 151 100-watt heat sink 5300 015-0970-013 CR 001 Transient suppressor 523-2906-001

7-8

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 82

PARTS LIST

UHF 15W PA Board AssemblyVHF 100W PA Board Assembly

Ref No. Description Part No.

EP 001 Insulator, high power resistor 018-1136-146

Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010

EP 002 Insulator, DC leads 018-1136-148

Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010

EP 003 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010

Terminal lug 586-0005-106 EP 004 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010 EP 006 Eyelet 031-0313-001 EP 007 Eyelet 031-0313-001

F 001 Fuse, 15A 32V 534-0332-015 FH 001 Fuse clip 534-1007-006 FH 002 Fuse clip 534-1007-006

HW 001 Screw, #6 x 1/4 torx zps 575-1006-008 HW 002 Screw, 4-40 x 1/4 pan head zps 575-1604-008 HW 003 Screw, 6-32 x 3/8 flat head 575-8206-012 HW 004 Screw, 8-32 x 3/8 hex soc cap blk 575-9076-012 HW 005 Screw, 2-56 x 3/8 pan hd 575-1602-012 HW 006 Screw, 4-40 x 5/16 pan hd zps ph 575-1604-010 HW 007 Washer, split lock #4 zps 596-1304-008 HW 008 Lock washer, internal 2 x .013 thk 596-2102-006 HW 010 .31 flag terminal 586-0004-004 HW 013 Stand-off, M-M 4-40 to 6-32 537-0140-008 HW 010 Nut, 4-40 560-2104-008 HW 010 Washer, No. 4 shakeproof 596-1104-008

L 001 3T .120 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-053 L 002 1T .140 in ID 18 awg inductor 542-0020-061 L 003 10T 43.0 nH sm d inductor 542-0030-010 L 004 8T .120 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-058 L 005 8T .120 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-058 L 006 1T .060 in ID smd inductor 542-0020-011 L 007 1T .120 in ID 18 awg inductor 542-0020-051 L 008 3T .120 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-053 L 009 3T .120 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-053 L 010 1T .140 in ID 18 awg inductor 542-0020-061 L 011 10T 43.0 nH smd inductor 542-0030-010 L 012 8T .120 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-058 L 013 8T .120 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-058 L 014 1T .060 in ID smd inductor 542-0020-011 L 015 1T .120 in ID 18 awg inductor 542-0020-051 L 016 3T .120 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-053 L 017 10 µH RF choke 542-4503-100

Ref No. Description Part No.

MP 153 Coax gasket 018-1136-144

PC 001 PC board, 100W PA

Q 001 100W VHF amp 576-0004-147 Q 002 100W VHF amp 576-0004-147

R 001 100 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-101 R 002 100 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-101 R 003 100 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-101 R 004 100 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-101 R 005 High power resistor, 50 watt 569-500 3-003 R 006 High power resistor, 150 watt 569-5003-001

RT 001 Thermistor, 10k ohm smd 569-3013-007

U 001 Hybrid coupler, 130-180 MHz 585-2001-001 U 002 Hybrid coupler, 130-180 MHz 585-2001-001

W 120 Coax, double shld RG 316/U 597-3002-011 W 500 Coax .141 dia. 597-3001-011 W 501 Power cable, RF to PA board 597-2002-238 W 502 RF pigtail cable 597-2002-239 W 5xx DC power cable assembly See A120

035-5315-5102

UHF 15W PA BOARD ASSEMBLY

Part No. 023-5335-511

C 500 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 502 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 503 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 504 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 505 .001 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-102 C 506 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 507 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 508 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 509 .001 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-102 C 513 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 514 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 515 100 pF NPO ±5% 50V cer smd 510-3601-101 C 516 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 517 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-101 C 518 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3606-104

7-9

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 83

UHF 15W PA Board Assembly (Cont’d)

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 519 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 520 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-101 C 521 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 522 100 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-101 C 523 5.1 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-519 C 524 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-101 C 525 7.5 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-759 C 526 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 528 5.1 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-519 C 529 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 532 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 5 10-3606-104 C 533 100 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-101 C 534 1.0 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-109 C 535 3.9 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-399 C 536 5.1 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-519 C 537 5.1 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-519 C 538 3.9 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-399 C 539 4.7 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-479 C 540 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 5 10-3606-104 C 541 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 542 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 543 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606 -1 05 C 544 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 545 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 546 6.8 uF 35V tantalum smd 510-2635-689 C 547 100 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-101 C 548 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 549 4.7 uF ±10% 25V tantalum smd 510-2627-479 C 551 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 552 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 553 12 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-120 C 554 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 555 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 556 .018 X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-183 C 557 100 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-101 C 558 6.8 uF 35V tantalum smd 510-2635-689 C 559 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 5 10-3606-104 C 560 100 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-101 C 561 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 562 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 5 10-3606-104 C 563 100 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-101 C 564 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 565 8.2 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-829 C 566 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 567 27 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-270

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 567 56 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 5 10-366 3-560 C 568 15 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-150 C 569 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 570 24 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 5 10-366 3-240 C 571 56 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 5 10-366 3-560 C 572 100 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-101 C 573 47 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 5 10-366 3-470 C 574 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 575 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 576 51 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 5 10-366 3-510 C 577 51 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 5 10-366 3-510 C 578 4.7 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-479 C 579 5.6 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-569 C 580 56 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 5 10-366 3-560 C 581 3.9 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-399 C 582 24 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 5 10-366 3-240 C 583 15 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-150 C 584 56 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 5 10-366 3-560 C 585 15 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-150 C 586 20 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-200 C 587 .018 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-183 C 593 .018 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-183 C 594 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 595 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 596 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 597 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 598 .010 uF X7R ±5% cer smd 510-3609-103 C 599 1500 uF 25V alum electrolytic 510-4055-152 C 600 10 uF 25V tantalum smd 510-2627-100 C 601 470 uF 16V alum electrolytic 510-4056-471 C 602 .018 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-183 C 603 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-101 C 606 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 607 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 608 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3606-104 C 609 470 uF 16V alum electrolytic 510-4056-471 C 612 27 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 5 10-366 3-270 C 613 1800 pF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-182 C 650 22 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 5 10-366 3-220

CR 500 Switching diode 523-1504-002 CR 501 Pin diode 523-1504-032 CR 502 Switching diode 523-1504-002 CR 503 Pin switching diode 523-1504-001 CR 504 Switching diode 523-1504-002

7-10

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 84

UHF 15W PA Board Assembly (Cont’d)

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

CR 505 Pin diode 523-1504-032 CR 506 Pin switching diode 523-1504-001 CR 507 Pin switching diode 523-1504-001 CR 508 Pin switching diode 523-1504-001 CR 509 HC diode 523-1504-016 CR 510 Transient suppressor 523-2906-001

EP 001 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010 EP 002 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010 EP 003 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010 EP 004 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010 EP 005 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010 EP 006 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-002 EP 510 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010

J 501 Connector, 20-pin 515-7111-230 J 502 Connector, SMT receptacle 515-7111-470

L 500 3T .100 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-043 L 501 3T .100 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-043 L 502 3T .080 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-033 L 503 4T .080 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-034 L 504 3T .080 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-033 L 505 4T .100 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-044 L 506 4T .100 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-044 L 507 1.0 uH ±5% smd inductor 542-9000-109 L 508 10T 43.0 nH sm d inductor 542-0030-010 L 509 4T .100 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-044 L 511 4T .100 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-044 L 512 1.0 uH ±5% smd inductor 542-9000-109 L 513 9T 35.5 nH smd inductor 542-0030-009 L 514 9T 35.5 nH smd inductor 542-0030-009 L 515 10T 43.0 nH sm d inductor 542-0030-010 L 517 DC line filter 542-5010-003

MP 501 Inductor shield 017-9700-005

PC 500 PC board, 15W UHF PA rev 1

Q 500 PNP power Darlington TO-220 576-0007-013 Q 501 Silicon NPN gen purpose 576-0003-658 Q 502 Silicon NPN gen purpose 576-0003-658 Q 503 Silicon NPN gen purpose 576-0003-658 Q 504 Silicon NPN gen purpose 576-0003-658 Q 505 Silicon NPN gen purpose 576-0003-658

035-5335-500 1

Ref No. Description Part No.

Q 506 Silicon NPN gen purpose 576-0003-658 Q 507 NPN 50 watts UHF 576-0004-205 Q 508 NPN 15 watts UHF 576-0004-207 Q 509 NPN 3 watts UHF 576-0004-209 Q 510 Silicon NPN gen purpose 576-0003-658 Q 511 PNP power Darlington TO-220 576-0007-013 Q 512 PNP switching 576-0003-612 R 500 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-203 R 501 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-203 R 502 2.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-222 R 503 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 504 3.9k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-392 R 505 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-203 R 506 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 507 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 508 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-203 R 510 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 511 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 512 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 513 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-203 R 514 220k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-224 R 515 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 516 1.8k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-182 R 517 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-203 R 518 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-473 R 519 18k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-183 R 520 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 521 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 522 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 523 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-473 R 524 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-203 R 525 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 526 2.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-202 R 527 Zero ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-001 R 528 220k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-224 R 529 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 530 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 531 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-203 R 532 100 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-101 R 533 100 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-101 R 534 4.3k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-432 R 535 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 536 470k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-474 R 537 4.7k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-472 R 538 4.7k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-472

7-11

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 85

PARTS LIST

UHF 40W PA Board AssemblyUHF 15W PA Board Assembly (Cont’d)

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 539 68k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -6 83 R 540 4.3k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-432 R 541 330 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -3 31 R 542 6.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-622 R 543 220 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -2 21 R 544 220k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-224 R 545 220k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-224 R 546 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 547 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 548 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -1 03 R 549 18k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -1 83 R 550 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -2 03 R 551 68k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -6 83 R 552 820 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -8 21 R 553 200 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-201 R 554 .030 ohm ±5% 2W wirewound 569-2019-307 R 555 200 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-201 R 556 470 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -4 71 R 557 4.7k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-472 R 558 18k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -1 83 R 559 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -1 03 R 560 68k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -6 83 R 561 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -2 03 R 562 18 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-180 R 563 470 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-471 R 564 470 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-471 R 565 680 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -6 81 R 566 470 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-471 R 567 100 ohm ±5% .75W smd 569-0135-101 R 568 300 ohm ±5% +/- 400 PPM smd 569-0116-301 R 569 300 ohm ±5% +/- 400 PPM smd 569-0116-301 R 570 18k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -1 83 R 571 68k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -6 83 R 572 330 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -3 31 R 573 68k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -6 83 R 574 10k ohm ±5% thermistor 569-3013-007 R 575 18k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -1 83 R 576 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -1 01 R 577 100k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-104 R 578 1.2k Ohm J 1206smd Rl 569-0115-122 R 579 1.2k Ohm J 1206smd Rl 569-0115-122 R 580 1.2k Ohm J 1206smd Rl 569-0115-122 R 581 560 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -5 61 R 582 Zero ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-001 R 583 Zero ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-001

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 584 Zero ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-001

U 501 Shift register, 8-stage MC4094 544-3016-094 U 502 Op amp, dual LM2904 544-2019-004 U 505 Current sense amp MAX472ESA 544-2039-002 U 507 Op amp, dual LM2904 544-2019-004 U 508 Regulator, 8V 3A MC78TO8CT 544-2003-095

UHF 40W PA BOARD ASSEMBLY

Part No. 023-5365-501

C 002 240 pF, ±5%, high Q, smd 510-3667-241 C 003 240 pF, ±5%, high Q, smd 510-3667-241 C 004 8.2 pF, ±5%, high Q, 0805 510-3667-829 C 005 27 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-270 C 006 27 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-270 C 007 47 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-470 C 008 47 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-470 C 014 27 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-270 C 015 27 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-270 C 017 5.1 pF, ±.1 pF, high Q, smd 510-3667-519 C 018 150 pF, ±5%, high Q, smd 510-3667-151 C 020 10 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-100 C 021 10 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-100 C 022 56 pF, ±5%, high Q, 0805 510-3667-560 C 026 27 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-270 C 027 27 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-270 C 028 3.9 pF, ±.1 pF, high Q, smd 510-3667-399 C 029 3.9 pF, ±.1 pF, high Q, smd 510-3667-399 C 030 5.1 pF, ±.1 pF, high Q, smd 510-3667-519 C 106 150 pF ±5% NPO 1206 smd 510-3601-151 C 107 150 pF ±5% NPO 1206 smd 510-3601-151 C 108 150 pF ±5% NPO 1206 smd 510-3601-151 C 109 150 pF ±5% NPO 1206 smd 510-3601-151 C 111 150 pF ±5% NPO 1206 smd 510-3601-151 C 112 150 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-151 C 113 150 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-151 C 124 150 pF, ±5%, high Q, smd 510-3667-151 C 125 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-183 C 126 6.8 µF 35V tantalum smd 510-2635-689 C 127 .001 µF ±5% NPO 1206 smd 510-3602-102 C 128 150 pF, ±5%, high Q, smd 510-3667-151 C 129 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-183 C 130 6.8 µF 35V tantalum smd 510-2635-689 C 131 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151

7-12

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 86

UHF 40W PA Board Assembly

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 132 .0047 µF ±10% smd 510-3606-472 C 133 6.8 µF 35V tantalum smd 510-2635-689 C 141 6.8 µF 35V tantalum smd 510-2635-689 C 142 .0047 µF ±10% smd 510-3606-472 C 143 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 144 150 pF, ±5%, high Q, smd 510-3667-151 C 145 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-183 C 146 6.8 µF 35V tantalum smd 510-2635-689 C 147 .001 µF ±5% NPO 1206 smd 510-3602-102 C 148 6.8 µF 35V tantalum smd 510-2635-689 C 149 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-183 C 150 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 151 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 152 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 153 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-183 C 154 470 µF 16V electrolytic 510-4056-471 C 161 6.8 µF 35V tantalum smd 510-2635-689 C 162 .0047 µF ±10% smd 510-3606-472 C 163 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 165 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 166 6.8 µF 35V tantalum smd 510-2635-689 C 167 6.8 µF 35V tantalum smd 510-2635-689 C 201 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-183 C 202 150 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-151 C 203 1500 µF 25V alum electrolytic 510-4055-152 C 204 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-183 C 205 150 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3601-151 C 208 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 5 10-3606-104 C 209 10 µF 25V tantalum smd 510-2627-100 C 210 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 211 .01 µF X7R ±5% 50V cer smd 510-3609-103 C 212 470 µF 16V electrolytic 510-4056-471 C 214 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 215 470 µF 16V electrolytic 510-4056-471 C 216 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 217 6.8 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-689 C 218 24 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-240 C 220 33 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-330 C 221 39 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-390 C 223 24 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-240 C 224 18 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-180 C 227 47 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-470 C 228 8.2 pF, ±.1 pF, high Q, smd 510-3667-829 C 230 6.8 pF, ±1%, high Q, 0805 510-3661-689 C 300 150 pF, ±1%, high Q, smd 510-3666-151

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 301 3.9 pF, ±1%, high Q, smd 510-3666-399 C 302 5.1 pF, ±1%, high Q, smd 510-3666-519 C 303 5.6 pF, ±1%, high Q, smd 510-3666-569 C 304 5.1 pF, ±1%, high Q, smd 510-3666-519 C 305 3.9 pF, ±1%, high Q, smd 510-3666-399 C 306 1.0 pF, ±.1 pF, high Q, smd 510-3667-109 C 307 240 pF, ±5%, high Q, smd 510-3667-241 C 308 240 pF, ±5%, high Q, smd 510-3667-241 C 401 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 402 4.7 pF, ±.1 pF, high Q, smd 510-3607-479 C 403 5.6 pF, ±.1 pF, high Q, smd 510-3607-569 C 404 33 pF ±5% NPO cer smd 510-3601-330 C 405 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 406 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 407 100 pF, ±5%, high Q, smd 510-3667-101 C 408 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 409 6.8 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-689 C 410 6.8 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-689 C 411 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 5 10-3606-105 C 413 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 414 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 5 10-3606-105 C 415 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 416 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 417 10 pF, ±1%, high Q, cer smd 510-3661-100 C 501 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 502 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 503 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 504 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 505 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 506 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 507 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 508 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 509 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 510 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 511 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 512 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-183 C 513 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 514 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 516 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 517 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 518 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 519 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151 C 521 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 522 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3606-104 C 523 150 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-151

7-13

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 87

UHF 40W PA Board Assembly

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 524 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 5 10-3606-104

CR 101 Diode, Hipax Pin, F-1072t 523-1504-036 CR 102 Diode, Hipax Pin, F-1072t 523-1504-036 CR 103 Diode, Hipax Pin, F-1072t 523-1504-036 CR 104 Diode, Hipax Pin, F-1072t 523-1504-036 CR 105 HC diode 523-1504-016 CR 106 Diode, Hipax Pin, F-1072t 523-1504-036 CR 200 Zener overvoltage transient supp. 523-2907-016 CR 401 Pin switching diode 523-1504-001 CR 402 Diode, Hipax Pin, F-1072t 523-1504-036 CR 403 Pin switching diode 523-1504-001 CR 404 Diode, 1 amp, smd, fast recovery 523-1600-001 CR 501 Switching diode 523-1504-002 CR 502 Switching diode 523-1504-002 CR 503 Switching diode 523-1504-002

D 002 Diode, 5 amp, smd, fast recovery 523-1601-550

J 101 Connector, SMT receptacle 515-7111-470 J 102 Connector, 20-pin 515-7111-230 J 401 Connector, SMT receptacle 515-7111-470

L 001 220 nH inductor smd 542-9003-228 L 002 220 nH inductor smd 542-9003-228 L 003 220 nH inductor smd 542-9003-228 L 102 120 nH inductor smd 542-9003-128 L 103 120 nH inductor smd 542-9003-128 L 104 150 nH inductor smd 542-9003-158 L 109 8T .120 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-058 L 110 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010 L 111 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010 L 115 8T .120 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-058 L 116 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010 L 117 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010 L 120 10T inductor 016-0020-050 L 121 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010 L 122 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010 L 123 3T .080 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-033 L 124 3T .080 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-033 L 125 4T .080 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-034 L 126 3T .060 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-013 L 127 3T .060 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-013 L 200 DC line filter 542-5010-003 L 401 3T .100 in ID smd inducto r 542-0020-043

Ref No. Description Part No.

L 402 3T .100 in ID smd inductor 542-0020-043 L 403 150 nH induct or smd 542-9003-158 L 404 220 nH induct or smd 542-9003-228 L 501 220 nH induct or smd 542-9003-228 L 503 .018 µH indu ctor smd 542-9001-187

MP 001 Low-pass filter wrap-around 017-9700-010 PC 001 PC board, UHF 40W PA rev 2

Q 001 LDMOS FET, 35W 12.5V 576-0006-453 Q 005 Silicon NPN gen purpose 576-0003-658 Q 010 Dual-Device FET 70W 12.5V 576-0006-454 Q 200 PNP power Darlington amp 576-0007-013 Q 201 PNP switching 576-0003-612 Q 401 Silicon NPN gen purpose 576-0003-658 Q 403 Silicon NPN gen purpose 576-0003-658 Q 501 Silicon NPN gen purpose 576-0003-658 Q 502 PNP switching 576-0003-612 Q 503 Silicon NPN gen purpose 576-0003-658 Q 504 PNP switching 576-0003-612

R 004 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-101 R 005 470 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-471 R 006 22 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-220 R 007 22 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-220 R 008 470 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-471 R 009 10 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-100 R 107 1.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-122 R 109 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-101 R 110 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-101 R 111 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-101 R 112 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-101 R 113 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-101 R 114 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 115 180 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-181 R 117 620 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-621 R 118 390 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-391 R 119 620 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-621 R 120 470 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-471 R 122 620 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-621 R 123 390 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-391 R 124 1.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-122 R 125 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-101 R 126 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-101 R 127 220k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-224

035-5365-5002

7-14

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 88

PARTS LIST

UHF 40W PA Board Assembly 800 MHz 35W PA Board Assembly

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 128 100k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-104 R 129 4.3k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-432 R 130 51 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-510 R 131 51 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-510 R 132 .005 ohm ±5% 2W smd 569-2019-057 R 133 220k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-224 R 134 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -1 01 R 135 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -1 01 R 136 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 137 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 138 470 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -4 71 R 139 51 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-510 R 140 390 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -3 91 R 141 470 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-4 71 R 142 1.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-122 R 200 1.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-122 R 201 1.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-122 R 202 1.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-122 R 203 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -1 01 R 204 100k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-104 R 205 560 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -5 61 R 300 220k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-224 R 400 510 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -5 11 R 401 68k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -6 83 R 402 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -4 73 R 403 560 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -5 61 R 404 51 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-510 R 406 220k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-224 R 407 510 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -5 11 R 408 510 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -5 11 R 409 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -4 73 R 410 1.8k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-182 R 411 510 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-5 11 R 412 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -4 73 R 501 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -4 73 R 502 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -2 03 R 503 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -2 03 R 504 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -2 03 R 505 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -2 03 R 506 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -2 03 R 507 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -2 03 R 508 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -2 03 R 509 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -2 03 R 510 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -1 03 R 511 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-1 03

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 512 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 513 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 514 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 515 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 516 Zero ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-001 R 517 100k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-104 R 519 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 520 2.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-222 R 522 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 523 1.8k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-182 R 524 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 525 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 526 220k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-224 R 527 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-473 R 528 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-473 R 529 5.1k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-512 R 530 100k ohm ±±1% 1/8W smd 569-0101-501 R 531 120 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-121 R 532 4.3k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-432 R 533 4.3k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-432 R 534 0 ohm jumper 569-0105-001 R 535 20k ohm ±1% .1W smd 569-0101-430 R 536 110k ohm ±1% .1W smd 569-0101-503

RT 501 10k ohm ±5%, thermistor, smd 569-3013-007

U 102 Current sense amp MAX472ESA 544-2039-002 U 201 Regulator, adj 5A MIC29503BT 544-2500-001 U 501 Shift reg, 8-stage MC4094 544-3016-094 U 502 Op amp, dual LM2904 544-2019-004

800 MHZ PA BOARD ASSEMBLY

Part No. 023-5385-501

C 501 3.9 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3653-3 99 C 502 7.5 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-399 C 503 1.0 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-109 C 504 7.5 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3663-399 C 505 3.9 pF ±10% 50V high Q smd 510-3653-3 99 C 506 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-390 C 507 9.1 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-919 C 508 1.8 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-189 C 509 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-390 C 510 2.2 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-229

7-15

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 89

800 MHz 35W PA Board Assembly

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 511 56 pF ±10% 50V high Q sm d 510-3653-5 60 C 513 1.8 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-189 C 514 12 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-120 C 515 8.2 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-829 C 516 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 517 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 518 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 519 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-390 C 521 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-390 C 522 2.2 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-229 C 524 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 525 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 526 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 527 .1 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3606-104 C 528 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 529 .1 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3606-104 C 530 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 531 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 532 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 533 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 534 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 535 12 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-120 C 536 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 537 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 538 5.6 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-569 C 539 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 540 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 541 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 542 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 543 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 544 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 545 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-390 C 546 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-1 83 C 547 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 548 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-390 C 549 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-1 83 C 550 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-390 C 551 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-1 83 C 552 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 553 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-1 83 C 554 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-390 C 555 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-1 83 C 556 3.0 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-309 C 557 10 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-100 C 558 12 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-120

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 559 18 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-180 C 560 0.01 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-103 C 561 18 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-180 C 562 4 pF 250V mini mica 510-0019-4 09 C 563 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 564 .01 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 565 56 pF ±10% 50V hi Q smd 510-3653-560 C 566 1.0 to 4.5 pF smd variable 512-1008-001 C 567 12 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-120 C 568 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-390 C 569 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-360 5-183 C 570 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-390 C 571 1500 µF 25V electrolytic 510-4055-152 C 572 100 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-101 C 573 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-390 C 577 .1 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-3606-104 C 579 10 µF 25V tantalum smd 510-2627-100 C 580 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 581 .01 µF X7R ±5% 50V cer smd 510-3609-103 C 585 470 µF 16V electrolytic 510-4056-471 C 586 470 µF 16V electrolytic 510-4056-471 C 589 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 590 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-360 5-183 C 591 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-360 5-183 C 592 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-390 C 593 .01 µF X7R ±10% 50V cer smd 510-3605-103 C 594 470 µF 16V electrolytic 510-4056-471 C 595 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 596 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 597 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 598 5.1 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-519 C 599 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 601 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 602 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 604 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 605 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 606 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 607 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 608 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 609 .018 µF ±10% X7R 50V cer smd 510-360 5-183 C 610 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 611 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 612 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 613 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 614 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390

7-16

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 90

800 MHz 35W PA Board Assembly

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 615 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 616 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 617 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 618 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 619 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 620 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 621 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 622 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 623 1 µF ±10% X7R 16V cer smd 510-3606-105 C 624 39 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3601-390 C 625 3.9 pF ±10% 50V hi Q smd 510-3653-399 C 626 3.9 pF ±10% 50V hi Q smd 510-3653-399 C 627 2.7 pF ±5% NPO 50V cer smd 510-3615-279 C 628 470 µF 35V electrolytic 510-4035-471

CR 501 Pin diode 523-1504-032 CR 502 Pin diode 523-1504-032 CR 503 Pin switching diode 523-1504-001 CR 504 Switching diode SOT-23 523-1504-002 CR 505 Switching diode SOT-23 523-1504-002 CR 507 Switching diode SOT-23 523-1504-002 CR 508 10V zener diode SOT-23 523-2016-100 CR 509 HC diode SOT-23 523-1504-016 CR 510 Transient suppressor, axial 523-2906-001 CR 516 Pin diode 523-1504-032 CR 517 Hc diode SOT-23 523-1504-016 CR 518 Pin diode 523-1504-032 CR 519 Pin diode 523-1504-032 CR 520 3.3V zener SOT-23 523-2016-339 CR 521 HC diode SOT-23 523-1504-016 CR 522 Switching diode SOT-23 523-1504-002 CR 523 Diode, 50V, 3 A IN5400 523-0019 -003 CR 524 Diode, zener low level 523-2519-066

EP 501 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010 EP 502 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010 EP 503 Ferrite bead smd 517-2503-010

J 501 Connector, 20-pin 515-7111-230 J 502 Connector, SMT Receptacle 515-7111-470

L 501 8.0nH smd air core 542-0030-003 L 502 8.0nH smd air core 542-0030-003 L 503 12 nH smd 542-9003-127 L 504 15 nH smd 542-9003-157

Ref No. Description Part No.

L 505 15 nH smd 542-9003-157 L 506 9T, 35.5 nH smd 542-0030-009 L 507 8T 22 AWG. 090 ID smd 542-0016-008 L 508 8T 22 AWG. 090 ID smd 542-0016-008 L 509 DC line filter 542-5010-003 L 510 4.7 nH smd inductor 542-9000-476 L 511 12 nH smd 542-9003-127 L 514 15 nH smd 542-9003-157

MP 501 Line choke tie-down bracket 017-9700-006 MP506 Transistor ground clip 017-2225-527 PC 001 PC board, 800 MHz PA rev 4 035-5385-500

Q 501 NPN general purpose sw/amp 576-0001-300 Q 502 PNP switching 576-0003-612 Q 503 NPN low noise amp 576-0003-618 Q 504 NPN general purpose SOT-23 576-0003-658 Q 505 NPN general purpose SOT-23 576-0003-658 Q 506 NPN general purpose SOT-23 576-0003-658 Q 507 NPN general purpose SOT-23 576-0003-658 Q 508 PNP low noise amp 576-0003-657 Q 509 NPN 800 MHz 45W amp 576-0004-8 17 Q 513 PNP pwr Darlington 576-0007-013 Q 515 PNP switching 576-0003-612 Q 516 NPN general purpose SOT-23 576-0003-658 Q 517 NPN general purpose SOT-23 576-0003-658

R 501 220k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0105-224 R 502 560 ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-561 R 503 100 ohm ±5% 3/4W sm d 569-0135-101 R 504 100 ohm ±5% 3/4W sm d 569-0135-101 R 505 220k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0105-224 R 506 220k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0105-224 R 507 68k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-683 R 508 4.7k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-472 R 509 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103 R 510 4.7k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-472 R 511 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-101 R 512 220 ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-221 R 513 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-203 R 514 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-203 R 515 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103 R 516 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-203 R 517 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103 R 518 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-203

7-17

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 91

800 MHz 35W PA Board Assembly

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 519 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 520 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-203 R 521 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 522 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-203 R 523 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 524 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-203 R 525 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 526 20k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-203 R 527 220k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0105-224 R 528 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 529 2.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-222 R 530 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 531 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-473 R 532 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-473 R 534 4.3k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-432 R 535 7.5k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-752 R 536 100k ohm ±1% 1/ 8W smd 569-0101-501 R 537 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 538 330 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-331 R 539 Zero ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-001 R 540 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 541 300 ohm ±5% .425W smd 569-0116-301 R 542 18 ohm ±5% .425W smd 569-0116-180 R 543 300 ohm ±5% .425W smd 569-0116-301 R 544 430 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-431 R 545 10 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-100 R 546 430 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-431 R 547 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-103 R 548 5.1k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-512 R 549 1k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-102 R 550 .015 ohm ±5% 2W smd 569-2019-157 R 551 200 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-201 R 552 200 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-201 R 553 6.8k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-682 R 554 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-101 R 555 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-101 R 556 100k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0105-104 R 557 220k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0105-224 R 558 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-473 R 559 510 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-511 R 560 510 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-511 R 561 560 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-561 R 562 100k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0105-104

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 563 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-101 R 564 1.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-122 R 565 1.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-122 R 569 91k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-913 R 570 220k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0105-224 R 571 75k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-753 R 572 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-473 R 573 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-473 R 574 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-473 R 575 1.8k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-182 R 576 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-473 R 577 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-473 R 578 1.8k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-182 R 579 120 ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-121 R 580 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103 R 581 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 582 680 ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-681 R 583 51 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-510 R 584 3.9k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-392 R 585 51 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-510 R 586 1.0k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-102 R 587 110 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-111 R 588 51 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-510 R 589 110 ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-111 R 590 100 ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-101 R 591 100k ohm ±5% 1/ 8W smd 569-0105-104 R 592 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-473 R 593 47k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-473 R 595 510 ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-511 R 596 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W sm d 569-0105-103 R 597 3.9k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-392 R 598 1.2k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0115-122 R 599 5.1k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-512 R 601 Zero ohm jumper 569-0105-001 R 602 10 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-100 R 603 10 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-100 R 604 330 ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-331 R 605 2k ohm ±5% 1W smd 569-0175-202 R 606 100k ohm ±5% 1/4W CC 569-1001-104 R 607 20k ohm ±5% 1/4W CC 569-1001-203

U 501 Shift register, 8-bit MC14094 544-3016-094 U 502 Op amp, low pwr quad LM2902 544-9017-011

7-18

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 92

Logic Board Assembly (ARM Version A)

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

U 503 RF switch, DC-2 GHz AS139-73 544-9015-100 U 504 20W 870 MHz power module 544-4001-127 U 505 Current sense amp MAX472ESA 544-2039-002 U 506 Regulator, low drop 3A MIC29303 544-2003-058

Z 501 Filter, 860 MHz 20 MHz 3-pole 532-2007-011

LOGIC BOARD ASSEMBLY

(ARM, VER A)

Part No. 023-5300-421

(See Section 1.12.2 for more information on this board.)

C 000 .22 farad 5.5V dbl-layer electric 5 10-9510 -055 C 001 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 002 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 003 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 004 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 005 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 006 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 007 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 008 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 009 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 010 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 011 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 012 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 013 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 014 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 015 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 016 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 017 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 018 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 019 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 020 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 021 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 022 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 023 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 024 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 025 15 pF ±.1 pF NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-150 C 026 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 027 15 pF ±.1 pF NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-150 C 032 .22 µF ±10% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3686-224 C 033 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 034 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 035 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 036 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 037 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 038 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 039 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 040 330 pF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-331 C 041 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 042 .01 µF X7R ±10% 25V cer smd 510-3675-103 C 043 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 044 1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3631-105 C 045 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 046 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 047 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 048 10 pF ±.1 pF NPO 25V cer smd 510-3673-100 C 049 10 pF ±.1 pF NPO 25V cer smd 510-3673-100 C 050 68 µF ±10% 16V tantalum 510-2625-680 C 051 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 052 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 053 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 054 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 055 68 µF ±10% 16V tantalum 510-2625-680 C 056 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 057 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 058 100 µF 10V tantalum smd 510-2624-101 C 059 4.7 µF 10V tantalum smd 510-2624-479 C 060 4.7 µF 10V tantalum smd 510-2624-479 C 061 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 062 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 063 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 064 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 065 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 066 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 067 3900 pF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-392 C 068 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 069 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 070 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 071 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 072 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 073 1 µF ±20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3636-105 C 074 1 µF ±20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3636-105 C 075 1 µF ±20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3636-105 C 076 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 077 1 µF ±20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3636-105 C 078 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 079 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 080 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 081 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104

7-19

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 93

Logic Board Assembly (ARM Version A)

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 082 .1 µF X7R ±10% 16V cer smd 5 10-3606-104 C 083 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 084 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 085 1 µF ±20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3636-105 C 086 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 087 100 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-101 C 088 1 µF ±20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3636-105 C 089 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 090 4700 pF 10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-472 C 091 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 092 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 093 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 094 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 095 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 096 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 097 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 098 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 099 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 100 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 101 .1 µF X7R ±10% 16V cer smd 5 10-3606-104 C 102 10 µF 10V tantalum smd 510-2624-100 C 103 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 104 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 105 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 106 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 107 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 108 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 109 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 110 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 111 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680 -104 C 112 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 113 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 114 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 115 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 116 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 117 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 118 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 119 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 120 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 121 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 122 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 123 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 124 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 125 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 126 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 127 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 128 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 129 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 130 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 131 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 132 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 133 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 134 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 135 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 136 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 137 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 138 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 139 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 140 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 141 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 142 10 pF ±.1 pF NPO 25V cer smd 510-3673-100 C 143 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 144 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 145 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 146 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 147 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 148 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 149 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 150 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 151 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 152 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 153 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 154 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 155 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 156 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 157 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 158 33 pF 10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-330 C 159 33 pF 10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-330 C 160 33 pF 10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-330 C 161 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 162 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 163 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 164 33 pF 10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-330 C 165 33 pF 10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-330 C 166 33 pF 10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-330 C 167 33 pF 10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-330 C 168 33 pF 10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-330 C 169 33 pF 10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-330 C 170 33 pF 10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-330 C 171 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104

7-20

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 94

Logic Board Assembly (ARM Version A)

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 174 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 175 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 176 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 177 10 µF 10V tantalum smd 510-2624-100 C 178 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 179 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 180 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 181 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 182 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 183 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 184 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 185 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 186 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 187 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 188 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 189 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 190 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 191 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 192 10 pF ±.1 pF NPO 25V cer smd 510-3673-100 C 193 33 pF 10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-330 C 194 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 195 33 pF 10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-330 C 196 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 197 10 pF ±.1 pF NPO 25V cer smd 510-3673-100 C 199 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 200 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 201 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 202 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104 C 203 10 pF ±.1 pF NPO 25V cer smd 510-3673-100 C 204 .1 µF X7R ±10% 16V cer smd 5 10-3606-104 C 205 10 µF 10V tantalum smd 510-2624-100 C 207 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 5 10-3680-104

Ref No. Description Part No.

J 001 Connector, 16-pin 515-7000-668 J 002 Connector, 25-pin 515-7113-071 J 003 Connector, 25-pin 515-7113-071 J 004 Connector, 25-pin 515-7113-071 J 005 Connector, 13-pin 515-7111-262 J 006 Connector, 13-pin 515-7111-262 J 007 Connector, 5-pin 515-7111-254 J 008 Connector, 12-pin 515-7111-261 J 009 Connector, 2 x 14 pin 515-9500-045 J 010 Connector, 25-pin 515-7113-071 J 011 Connector, 5-pin 515-7111-254

L 002 1.8 µH 350 ma smd 542-9230-027 L 003 33 µH 1.2A smd 542-9230-025 L 004 Ferrite bead smd 542-9230-005 L 005 Ferrite inductor 542-9230-021 L 006 Ferrite bead smd 542-9230-005 L 008 Ferrite inductor 542-9230-021 L 009 Ferrite inductor 542-9230-021 L 011 Ferrite inductor 542-9230-021 L 012 Ferrite inductor 542-9230-0 21 L 014 Ferrite inductor 542-9230-0 21 L 015 Ferrite inductor 542-9230-0 21 L 016 Ferrite inductor 542-9230-0 21 L 017 Ferrite inductor 542-9230-0 21 L 018 Ferrite inductor 542-9230-0 21 L 019 Ferrite inductor 542-9230-0 21 L 020 Ferrite inductor 542-9230-0 21 L 021 Ferrite inductor 542-9230-0 21

PC 410 PC board, P25 trunking logic Rev 8

035-1800-410 8

D 002 5.6V zener 523-2016-569 D 003 Dual switch-com cathode 523-1504-022 D 005 Diode, Schottky rect 5 23-0519-034 D 006 Dual switch-com cath 523-1504-022 D 007 Dual switch-com cath 523-1504-022 D 008 18V zener 523-2601-180 D 009 Dual switch-com cath 523-1504-022 D 011 5.1V zener 523-2601-519 D 012 Dual switch-com cath 523-1504-022 D 015 Switching diode 523-1004-021

F 001 Fuse, 0.5A smd 534-5002-009

Q 001 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 002 NPN switching 576-0003-714 Q 003 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 004 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 005 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 006 Transistor 576-0003-725 Q 007 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 008 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 009 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 010 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 011 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 012 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658

7-21

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 95

Logic Board Assembly (ARM Version A)

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

Q 013 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 014 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 015 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 016 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 017 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 018 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 019 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 020 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 021 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 022 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 023 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 024 Deleted Q 025 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 026 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 027 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 028 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658 Q 029 NPN general purpose 576-0003-658

R 001 4.7k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-472 R 002 4.7k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-472 R 003 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 004 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 005 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 006 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 007 390k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-394 R 008 0 ohm jumper 569-0155-001 R 009 4.7k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-472 R 011 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 012 100 ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-101 R 013 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 014 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 015 47k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-473 R 016 100 ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-101 R 017 1k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-102 R 018 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 019 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 020 6.8k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-682 R 021 1.0M ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-105 R 024 1k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-102 R 025 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 026 47k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-473 R 027 510k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-514 R 028 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 029 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 030 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 031 10 ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 5 69-0155-100 R 032 10 ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 5 69-0155-100 R 033 0 ohm jumper 569-0155-001 R 034 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 035 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 036 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 037 1k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 5 69-0155-102 R 038 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 039 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 040 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 041 47k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-473 R 042 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 043 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 044 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 045 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 046 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 047 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 048 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 049 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 050 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 051 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 052 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 053 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 054 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 055 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 056 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 057 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 058 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 059 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 060 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 061 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 062 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 063 22k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-223 R 064 1k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 5 69-0155-102 R 065 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 066 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 067 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 068 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 069 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 070 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 071 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 072 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 073 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 075 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 077 47k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-473

7-22

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 96

Logic Board Assembly (ARM Version A)

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 078 47k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-473 R 079 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 080 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 081 47k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-473 R 082 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -1 03 R 083 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105 -1 03 R 084 220k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-224 R 085 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 086 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 087 0 ohm jumper 569-0155-001 R 088 220k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-224 R 089 330 ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-331 R 090 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 091 220k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-224 R 092 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 093 220k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-224 R 094 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 095 330 ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-331 R 096 6.8k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-682 R 097 6.8k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-682 R 098 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 099 47k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-473 R 100 6.8k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-682 R 101 390k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-394 R 102 47k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-473 R 103 47k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-473 R 104 6.8k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-682 R 105 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 106 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 107 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 108 6.8k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-682 R 109 6.8k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-682 R 110 150 ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-151 R 111 150 ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-151 R 112 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 113 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 114 10 ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-100 R 115 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 116 100 ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-101 R 117 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 118 180k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-184 R 119 68k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-683 R 120 2.2M ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-225 R 121 6.8k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-682 R 122 56k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-563

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 123 47k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-473 R 124 47k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-473 R 125 6.8k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-682 R 126 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 127 68k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-683 R 128 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 129 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 131 47k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-473 R 132 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 133 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 134 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 135 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 136 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 137 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 138 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 139 Deleted R 140 10k ohm ±5% 1/8W smd 569-0105-103 R 141 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 142 100 ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-101 R 143 10 ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 5 69-0155-100 R 144 10 ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 5 69-0155-100 R 146 4.7k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-472 R 147 1k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 5 69-0155-102 R 148 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 149 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 150 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 151 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 152 330 ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-331 R 153 330 ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-331 R 154 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 155 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 156 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 157 47k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-473 R 158 100 ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-101 R 161 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 162 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 163 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 164 33.2k ohm ±1% 0.1W smd 569-0151-451 R 165 Deleted R 166 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 167 4.7k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-472 R 168 0 ohm jumper 569-0155-001 R 170 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 171 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 172 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103

7-23

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 97

Logic Board Assembly (ARM Version A)

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 173 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 174 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 175 Deleted R 176 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 177 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 178 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 179 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 180 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 181 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 182 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 183 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 184 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 185 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 186 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 187 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 188 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 189 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 190 1k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-102 R 191 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 192 1k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-102 R 194 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 195 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 196 4.7k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-472 R 197 270k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-274 R 198 4.7k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-472 R 199 0 ohm jumper 569-0155-001 R 200 0 ohm jumper 569-0155-001 R 201 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 202 0 ohm jumper 569-0155-001 R 203 0 ohm jumper 569-0155-001 R 204 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 205 0 ohm jumper 569-0155-001 R 206 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 207 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 208 1.0M ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-105 R 209 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 210 0 ohm jumper 569-0155-001 R 213 0 ohm jumper 569-0155-001 R 216 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 217 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 218 10k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-103 R 219 0 ohm jumper 569-0155-001 R 220 0 ohm jumper 569-0155-001 R 221 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 222 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 223 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 224 6.8k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-682 R 226 0 ohm jumper 569-0155-001 R 227 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 228 100k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-104 R 250 0 ohm jumper 569-0155-001 R 255 27k ohm ±5% 1/16W smd 569-0155-273

S 001 Switch detector mom NO 583-9512-002

U 001 Programmable logic 023-9998-492 U 002 Flash 5V 4M 256K x 16

AT49F4096A-90TI U 003 Regulator, lo-drop TPS7333QD 544-1020-009 U 004 NAND, 2 input TC7SH00FU 544-1010-012 U 005 DSP RAM 64 x 16

CY7C1021B-15ZI U 006 Microcontroller, ARM

AT91F40816-4CI U 007 RS232 driver LTC1338IG 544-1015-706 U 008 SRAM 256 x 16 CY62146V7UZI 544-5001-127 U 009 D- flip flop HC574 544-3766-574 U 010 D- flip flop HC574 544-3766-574 U 011 DC/DC conv 5V MAX744AEWE 544-1010-744 U 012 DSP TMS320C50PGEA 544-1010-018 U 013 Regulator 5V LT1121IST-5 544-1011-121 U 014 RS485 driver SN65176 544-2023-027 U 015 Op-amp quad 324 544-1020-324 U 016 Multiplexer triple 4053 544-1014-053 U 017 Op amp, dual 358 5 44-1020-385 U 018 Op amp, dual 358 5 44-1020-385 U 019 Op amp, dual 358 5 44-1020-385 U 020 UART, dual SCC2692 544-1010-038 U 021 A/D conv 8-bit serial TLC548I 544-1010-548 U 022 Multiplexer triple 4053 544-1014-053 U 023 D- flip flop HC574 544-3766-574 U 024 D- flip flop HC574 544-3766-574 U 025 EEPROM 32k x 8 U 026 Bus xcvr octal SN74LVCC3245 544-1010-248 U 027 Bus xcvr octal SN74LVCC3245 544-1010-248 U 028 Bus xcvr octal SN74LVCC3245 544-1010-248 U 030 ADSIC 544-9100-002 U 031 Bus xcvr octal SN74LVCC3245 544-1010-248 U 032 Multiplexer triple 4053 544-1014-053 U 033 Op amp, dual 358 5 44-1020-385

AT24C256W-10SI 544-1020-256

544-5001-356

544-5003-360

544-5001-363

7-24

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 98

Logic Board Assembly (PPC Version B)

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

Y 001 Crystal 20.0000 MHz 521-3060-037 Y 002 Crystal 3.6864 MHz smd 521-3060-053 Y 003 Crystal osc, prog 35.0208 MHz

SG-8002JC

521-9001-350

LOGIC BOARD ASSEMBLY (VER B)

SEM Version Part No. 023-5300-611

UCM Version Part No. 023-5300-621

(See Section 1.12.2 for more information on these boards.)

A 001 SEM encryption module BGA 023-5000-980

(-611 SEM board only) UCM encrpt module NNTN4433A 585-5000-924 (-621 UCM board only)

A 699 UCM jack termination plug 023-5300-699

(-611 SEM board only)

C 001 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 002 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 003 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 004 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 005 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 006 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 007 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 008 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 009 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 010 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 011 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 012 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 013 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 014 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 015 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 016 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 017 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 018 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 019 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 020 .22 µF 16V cer smd 510-3680-224 C 021 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 022 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 023 470 pF ±10% 25V cer smd 510-3681-471 C 024 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 025 5.1 pF ±.1 pF NPO cer smd 510-3673-519 C 026 6.2 pF ±.1 pF NPO cer smd 510-3673-629 C 027 10 pF ±.1 pF NPO cer smd 510-3673-100

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 028 470 pF ±10% 25V cer smd 510-3681-471 C 029 5.6 ±10% 25V cer smd 510-3681-569 C 030 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 031 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 032 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 033 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 034 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 035 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 036 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 037 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 038 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 039 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 040 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 041 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 042 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 043 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 044 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 045 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 046 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 047 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 048 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 049 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 050 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 051 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 052 33 pF ±10% 25V cer smd 510-3681-330 C 053 33 pF ±10% 25V cer smd 510-3681-330 C 054 33 pF ±10% 25V cer smd 510-3681-330 C 055 33 pF ±10% 25V cer smd 510-3681-330 C 056 33 pF ±10% 25V cer smd 510-3681-330 C 057 33 pF ±10% 25V cer smd 510-3681-330 C 058 33 pF ±10% 25V cer smd 510-3681-330 C 064 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 065 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 066 2.2 µF 16V ceramic smd 510-3925-225 C 069 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 070 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 071 2.2 µF 16V ceramic smd 510-3925-225 C 078 2.2 µF 16V ceramic smd 510-3925-225 C 079 1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3631-105 C 080 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 081 1.5 F electrolytic 510-9510-057 C 094 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 125 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 126 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 127 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103

7-25

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 99

Logic Board Assembly (PPC Version B)

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 128 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 129 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 130 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 131 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 183 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 184 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 185 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 186 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 187 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 188 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 189 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 190 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 191 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 192 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 196 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 197 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 198 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 199 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 200 .01 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-103 C 201 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 202 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 203 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 204 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 205 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 206 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 207 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 208 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 209 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 210 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 211 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 212 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 213 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 214 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 215 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 216 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 217 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 218 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 219 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 220 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 221 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 222 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 223 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 224 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 225 .01 µF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-103 C 226 10 µF 10V cer smd 510-3755-106

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 227 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-104 C 228 3300 pF ±10% 10V cer smd 510-3681-332 C 229 56 pF ±5% 50V cer smd 510-3684-560 C 230 47 pF ±10% cer smd 510-3681-470 C 231 1 µF ±20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3636-105 C 232 1 µF ±20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3636-105 C 233 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 234 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 235 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 236 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 237 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 238 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 239 1 µF ±20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3636-105 C 240 1 µF ±20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3636-105 C 241 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 242 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 243 100 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-101 C 245 1 µF ±20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3636-105 C 246 1 µF ±20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3636-105 C 247 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 248 4700 pF 10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-472 C 249 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 250 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 251 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 252 220 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-221 C 253 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 254 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 255 10 µF 10V tantalum smd 510-2624-100 C 257 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 258 10 µF 10V tantalum smd 510-2624-100 C 261 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 262 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 263 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 263 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 264 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 265 .1 µF +80-20% Z5U 25V cer smd 510-3680-104 C 266 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 267 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 268 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 269 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 270 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 271 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 272 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 273 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 274 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471

7-26

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.

Page 100

Logic Board Assembly (PPC Version B)

PARTS LIST

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 275 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 276 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 277 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 278 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 279 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 281 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 282 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 283 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 284 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 285 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 286 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 287 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 288 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 289 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 290 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 291 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 292 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 293 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 294 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 295 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 296 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 299 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 300 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 301 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 302 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 303 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 304 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 305 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 306 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 307 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 309 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471 C 312 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 313 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 314 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 315 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 316 10 µF 10V cer smd 510-3755-106 C 317 8.2pF +/-.1pF NPO cer smd 5 10-3673-829 C 318 10 µF 10V cer smd 510-3755-106 C 319 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 320 10 µF 10V cer smd 510-3755-106 C 321 10 pF ±.1 pF NPO cer smd 510-3673-100 C 322 10 pF ±.1 pF NPO cer smd 510-3673-100 C 323 10 µF 10V cer smd 510-3755-106 C 324 .1 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 5 10-3675-104 C 325 4.7 µF 20V tantalum smd 510-2626-479

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 326 .001 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-1 02 C 327 .001 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-1 02 C 328 .001 µF ±10% X7R 25V cer smd 510-3675-1 02 C 345 470 pF ±5% NPO 25V cer smd 510-3674-471

CR 001 Switching diode 523-1004-021 CR 002 Switching diode 523-1004-021 CR 004 Zener diode 5.6V 523-2016-569 CR 005 Zener diode 18V 523-2601-180 CR 006 Zener diode 5.1V 523-2601-519 CR 010 Zener diode 3.6V 523-2016-369 CR 011 Zener diode 3.6V 523-2016-369 CR 012 Switching diode 523-1004-021

D 001 Diode, Pin Switching 523-1504-001 D 002 Dual switch-com cathode 523-1504-022 D 003 Dual switch-com cathode 523-1504-022 D 004 Dual switch-com cathode 523-1504-022 D 005 Dual switch-com cathode 523-1504-022 D 006 Dual switch-com cathode 523-1504-022

F 001 Fuse, 0.5A smd 534-5002-009

J 001 Connector, 16-pin 515-7000-668 J 002 Connector, 25-pin 515-7113-071 J 005 Connector, 13-pin 515-7111-262 J 006 Connector, 13-pin 515-7111-262 J 007 Connector, 5-pin 515-7111-254 J 008 Connector, 12-pin 515-7111-261 J 009 Connector, 2 x 14 pin 515-9500-045 J 011 Connector, 5-pin 515-7111-254 J 012 Connector, 13-pin 515-7111-262 J 016 Connector, 25-pin UCM 515-7113-071

(-621 UCM board only) J 017 Connector, 25-pin 515-7113-071 J 018 Connector, 25-pin 515-7113-071

L 001 1.8 µH smd inductor 542-9017-189 L 007 270 nH smd inductor 542-9017-274 L 008 270 nH smd inductor 542-9017-274 L 010 270 nH smd inductor 542-9017-274 L 011 270 nH smd inductor 542-9017-274 L 015 -

L 053

L 054 8.2 µH smd inductor 542-9000-829

Ferrite inductor 542-9230-023

7-27

NOTE: Refer to Section 1.12 for version information.